Resumen Productos Datalogic SENSORES
-
Upload
phill-ramz -
Category
Documents
-
view
162 -
download
9
Transcript of Resumen Productos Datalogic SENSORES
SE
NS
OR
S
GUÍA DE PRODUCTOS Sensores fotoeléctr icos para la
detección, seguridad, medida e inspección
DATALOGIC AUTOMATIONBUSINESS UNITS
USS SENSORS
2
Nuestra unidad de negocio Unattended
Scanning System (USS), desarrolla y fabrica
soluciones de identificación automática con una
completa gama de lectores de códigos de
barras fijas y sistemas de láser y tecnología de
imágenes para asegurar la trazabilidad de los
procesos industriales en Factory Automation.
- Imagers
- Industrial Bar Code Scanners
- Embedded Bar Code Readers
Datasensor es la marca reconocida a nivel
internacional de nuestro fabricante
especialista en componentes de detección,
seguridad, medición e inspección y en
soluciones para la automatización industrial.
- Photoelectric Detection Devices
- Photoelectric Safety Devices
- Photoelectric Inspection Devices
- Photoelectric Measurement Devices
- Ultrasonic, Capacitive and
Inductive Proximity Sensors
RFID LASER MARKING
3
Escort Memory Systems es la marca que
denomina las soluciones industriales con
tecnología RFID de lectura/escritura. EMS es la
solución de identificación automática elegida por
muchos fabricantes del sector automovilístico,
electrónico, farmacéutico y alimentario.
- Low Frequency (LF)
- High Frequency (HF)
- Ultra High Frequency (UHF)
Laservall es uno de los principales fabricantes
de fuentes láser industriales con tecnología de
estado sólido (DPSS) a baja potencia (hasta
200 W) y sistemas de marcación. Lleva 15
años en el sector, entrando a formar parte del
Grupo Datalogic en el 2004.
- Laser Sources for Marking
- Laser Sources for Microwelding
- DPSS Technology
- IR, Green, UV Lasers
INDICE
DATALOGIC AUTOMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Sensores fotoeléctricos universales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Sensores tubulares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Sensores miniatura y sensores de fibra óptica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Sensores compactos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Sensores grandes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Sensores para aplicaciones fotoeléctricas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Sensores de herradura . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Sensores de luminiscencia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Sensores de contraste y color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Sensores de área . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Accesorios para sensores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Sensores de proximidad inductivos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Equipos fotoeléctricos de medición . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Haces cruzados de medición y sensores de línea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Sensores de distancia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Equipos fotoeléctricos de inspección . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Sensores de cámara de visión artificial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Iluminadores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Sensores de visión . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Configuradores y monitores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4
Equipos fotoeléctricos de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Guía para la selección . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Barreras de luz para la protección de dedos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Barreras de luz para la protección de manos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Barreras de luz para la protección del cuerpo humano y control de presencia . . 64Protección del cuerpo humano con Muting integrado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Protección del cuerpo humano con unidad pasiva y Muting integrado . . . . . . . . 70
Accesorios para barreras de luz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Reguladores de temperatura . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
DATALOGIC AUTOMATION aplica una garantía de tres años desde la fecha defabricación para todos los productos desglosados en este catálogo general
5
SENSORES FOTOELÉCTRICOS UNIVERSALES
6
Serie S10Serie básica de sensoresfotoeléctricos tubulares M18estándar con carcasa de metalIP69K- Mayores alcances de detección- Mayor protección mecánica IP69K- Modelos en acero inoxidable AISI-316L- Versiones para la industria mecánica o
alimentaria- Salida en configuración estándar de 3
cables
Serie S50 Amplia gama de sensoresfotoeléctricos tubulares M18estándar de aplicación universal
- Todas las funciones ópticas, también Láser- M18 plástico plano con fijación universal- Disponible en carcasa M18 de metal- Versión con rayos axiales o radiales, con
cable o conector- Salida estándar de 4 cables NO-NC
NPN o PNP
Serie S51 Serie básica de la gamaeconómica de sensoresfotoeléctricos tubulares tipoestándar M18- Selección de funciones ópticas universales- Las más altas prestaciones al mejor precio- Carcasa M18 plana de plástico o metal- Versiones con rayos axiales o radiales,
cable o conector- Salida estándar de 3 cables y
configuración claro/oscuro
NUEVAS PRESTACIONESNUEVAS PRESTACIONES
La nueva serie S10 desensores fotoeléctricos M18 encarcasa tubular de metal se hadesarrollado para lasaplicaciones más complejas enla industria mecánica oalimentaria. La protecciónmecánica IP69K garantiza laresistencia en maquinaria conchorros de agua y altastemperaturas hasta 80°C, asícomo presiones de hasta 100bar. Además, existen versionesde acero inoxidable AISI 316Lcon óptima resistencia a lacorrosión ácida para laexposición a los agentesquímicos y detergentes másagresivos. La serie S10 incluyepalpadores regulables hasta10, 35 o 60 cm y palpadoresfocalizados a 14 mm; reflex a 4m, reflex polarizados a 3 m yreflex para transparentes a 1m; barreras emisor/receptorhasta 18 m. Para la conexión alconector M12 sólo hacen faltatres cables para la alimentacióny la salida NPN o PNP.
La serie S50 ofrece todas lasfunciones ópticas con las másaltas prestaciones en el formatoestándar M18. Las versionesuniversales también sesuministran con emisión de rayosláser clase 1, las versiones másavanzadas con supresión defondo o de primer plano. Estaserie abarca también sensoresde contraste, luminiscencia odistancia con salida analógica.Todos los modelos estándisponibles en una innovadoracarcasa de plástico plana defijación universal (tuercas M18 otornillos M3), o bien en latradicional carcasa cilíndrica demetal. En ambos casos existenversiones con lente axial o radial,con cable o con conector M12 encaso de configuraciónnormalizada de 4 cables consalidas dobles NO-NC del tipoNPN o PNP. La serie S50 es lasolución de aplicación universalde referencia para laautomatización industrial.
La serie S51 ofrece la soluciónmás económica para ladetección óptica en laautomatización industrial. Losmenores costes, resultado deuna producción automatizada yexplotación económica óptimade los modelos de mayordivulgación, sin embargo, norepresentan una reducción delas altísimas prestaciones deestos modelos de funcionesópticas básicas. El palpadordirecto tiene una distancia fijade 10 cm o regulable hasta 40cm; el reflex tiene un alcancede 4 m o de 3 m en caso dereflex polarizado; la barreraemisor/receptor ofrece unalcance de hasta 18 m. Todoslos modelos están disponiblestanto en versión con carcasaplana de plástico o cilíndrica demetal, con lente axial o radial,con conexión por cable oconector M12 y salida NPN oPNP.
NUEVAS PRESTACIONES
NUEVAS PRESTACIONES NUEVA SERIENUEVA SERIE
7
Serie S15 Sensores fotoeléctricos tubulares
- Carcasa reducida de sólo 40 mm- Salida con cable - Sin potenciómetro de ajuste de
sensibilidad - Protección mecánica IP69K
Serie S40/S41 Amplia gama de sensoresfotoeléctricos miniatura segúnestándar europeo
- Modelos universales económicos conpotenciómetro
- Modelos de elevadas prestaciones con autoajuste- Supresión de fondo y reflex con láser- Reflex polarizado para transparentes- Salida de 4 cables NA/NC o con ajuste
externo (Remote)
Serie S8Línea avanzada de sensoresfotoeléctricos miniatura
- Dimensiones compactas (14x42x25mm)
- Frecuencia de conmutación hasta 10KHz
- Haz focalizado Ø < 1 mm (versión láser) - Alta resolución- Versiones coaxiales
En el mercado europeo, laserie S40 y la serie básica S41más económica representan lagama más completa desensores fotoeléctricosminiatura de dimensiones yfi jaciones estandarizadas.Incluyen barrerasemisor/receptor a 6 m, reflexpolarizado a 3 m y en caso deemisión láser a 6 m, reflex paratransparentes a 0.7 m,palpadores directos a 35 cm ycon láser a 15 cm, supresiónde fondo a 10 cm y conemisión láser a 6 cm para unadetección de mayor precisión.La salida es de tipo NO conajuste externo para losmodelos de la serie S40 conprogramación por autoajuste, osalida doble NO-NC para losmodelos con regulación porpotenciómetro de la serie S41más económica. En todos loscasos, están disponiblesversiones NPN o PNP, conconexión por cable o conconector M8.
La nueva serie S8 de sensoresminiatura ofrece excelentesprestaciones de detección, unacaracterística conocida general-mente de sensores más caros yde mayores dimensiones.Están disponibles los modeloscon reflex polarizado coaxial derayo láser, supresión mecánicade fondo con láser, reflex polari-zado coaxial con emisión LEDpara la detección de objetostransparentes y sensores decontraste con emisión RGB,rayo coaxial y alta resolución encarcasa compacta. Las versio-nes láser se caracterizan por suhaz focalizado inferior a 1 mm ysu frecuencia de conmutaciónde 10KHz, las más altas dispo-nibles en el mercado. Las ver-siones retroreflex garantizanuna excelente fiabilidad y pro-ductividad, gracias a una señaladicional de ALARMA en casode lentes sucias. Están disponi-bles en dos versiones diferen-tes, con conector M8 o M12.
La característica principal delos nuevos sensores tubularesM18 de la serie S15 es la longi-tud de la carcasa de sólo 40mm. Para una instalación rápi-da y sencilla, la serie S15 sesuministra sin potenciómetro deajuste. Esta característica redu-ce considerablemente la posibi-lidad que el operador modifiquelas prestaciones del sensor,garantizando de esta forma unamayor fiabilidad y productividaddel sensor. Están disponibleslas funciones ópticas másimportantes del sector indu-strial: reflex polarizado, reflexno polarizado, palpador de pro-ximidad y barreraemisor/receptor. Todos losmodelos disponen de protec-ción mecánica IP69K, con locual son idóneos para la aplica-ción bajo condiciones ambien-tales difíciles.
NEW MODELS NUEVOS MODELOS NUEVAS PRESTACIONES
8
SENSORES FOTOELÉCTRICOS UNIVERSALES
Serie S3ZSerie básica de sensoresfotoeléctricos miniatura estándar,sector Asia-Pacífico
- Supresión de fondo de 50-250 mm- Palpador a 0.7 m, con haz estrecho a 15 cm- Reflex polarizado a 4 m- Barrera emisor/receptor a 15 m- Salida con configuración estándar de 3
cables
Serie S7Amplificadores y sensores defibra óptica de formato compactopara guía DIN
- Modelos de alta resolución con display- Resolución de 12 bit y tiempos de
respuesta 50 ms- Versiones con potenciómetro y autoajuste- Amplia gama fibras ópticas como accesorio- Salida de 4 cables NO/NC o con ajuste
externo (Remote)
Serie S60Amplia gama de sensoresfotoeléctricos en formato compacto50x50 de aplicación universal- Selección de funciones ópticas universales- Las más altas prestaciones al mejor precio- Carcasa M18 plana de plástico o metal- Versión con rayos axiales o radiales,
cable o conector- Salida estándar de 3 cables y ajuste
claro/oscuro
NUEVOS MODELOS
Además de sus altos alcancesy su precio accesible, la serieS3Z es ideal en el mercadodebido a su formato dedimensiones y f i jacionesestándar, especialmente en elsector Asia-Pacífico. Estándisponibles los modelos debarrera emisor/receptor a 15 m,reflex polarizado a 4 m,palpador directo a 70 cm y hazestrecho para alcances entre50 y 150 mm. También estádisponible el modelo consupresión de fondo de 5 a 25cm con programación porpotenciómetro multigiro. Cadamodelo está previsto con salidaNPN o PNP, con posibilidad deconfiguración claro/oscuro ycon conexión por cable oconector M8. La carcasa deplástico es totalmenteimpermeable gracias a surecubrimiento total,garantizando la máximaestanqueidad mecánica,incluso si el modelo estáexpuesto a frecuentes lavados.
Los sensores de la serie S7ofrecen la solución ideal para elmontaje de distintas unidades enguías DIN, con la posibilidad dedeslocalizar los distintos puntosde detección con fibra óptica endistintos puntos de la máquina,también en espacios limitados oen caso de uniones mecánicas oelevadas temperaturas. Para ladetección más exacta y rápida deobjetos de pequeñasdimensiones o contrastes decolor o escala de grises mínimos,están disponibles modelos debajos tiempos de respuesta detan solo 50 μs y alta resolución a12 bit, con visualización en undisplay de 4 dígitos. Paradetecciones de mayor alcance,sin embargo, están disponiblesmodelos estándar a 500 μs y 10bit. La programación de lossensores es fácil y rápida,gracias al sistema EASYtouchTM
o a la regulación mediantepotenciómetro en los modelosmás económicos.
En la carcasa compacta de 50x 50 de tan sólo 15 mm degrosor, la serie S60 ofrecetodas las funciones ópticasmás desarrolladas, al mismotiempo que también todas lasfunciones universales dedetección. Los modelostambién están disponibles conemisión de láser, clase 1. Entrelos diferentes modelos seencuentran el reflex polarizadocon lente coaxial para ladetección de objetosreflectantes, incluyendotransparentes, el palpador consupresión de primer plano y/ode fondo, el sensor decontraste de luz blanca para ladetección de marcas de color,el sensor de luminiscencia conemisión UV y el sensor dedistancia con salida analógica.Existen la versión con conexiónpor cable o con conector M12de giro de 2 posiciones y consalida NPN o PNP conconfiguración normalizada.
La nueva serie S2Z ofrece 4modelos con las funcionesópticas básicas: 50 m debarrera emisor-receptor, 7 m dereflex polarizado, 1 m depalpador de proximidad y 2 mde supresión de fondo.Versiones con voltaje encorriente continua de 10 a 30Vcc y modelos multitensión de24 a 240 Vca / 12 … 240 Vcc,disponibles con temporizador,ajustables de 0,1 a 5segundos. Las salidas puedentener un relé SPDT o untransistor de colector abierto dedoble salida NPN/PNP. Elbloque de conexión facilita lasconexiones y simplifica lainstalación. La carcasa plásticay robusta garantiza unaexcelente resistencia enentornos de trabajoespecialmente adversos.
NUEVA SERIE
9
NUEVAS PRESTACIONESNUEVA SERIE
La serie S62 ofrece máximasprestaciones para las principalesfunciones de detección óptica.Los modelos de supresión defondo tienen una alcance de 3 a30 cm, con un LED de luz rojavisible, o bien de 6-60, 6-120 y20-200 cm con una emisión LEDinfrarroja. Los modelos reflexpolarizados con LED de luz rojavisible tienen un alto alcance,llegando hasta 10 m, con graninmunidad contra reflejosprocedentes de otros objetosreflectantes. Las versiones conLED de luz roja visible estándisponibles tanto con unasupresión de fondo de 3-15 comotambién de 5-35 cm, con reflexpolarizado hasta 22 m y mediciónde distancia de 40-120 mm. Lossensores láser se caracterizanpor un punto de luz muy pequeñoy su bajo tiempo de respuesta, locual garantiza una excelentecapacidad de detección repetida.
En la carcasa compacta de metalde tan sólo 41x49x15 mm la serieS90 ofrece todas las funcionesópticas para aplicacionesespeciales y universales. Estaserie también está disponiblecon emisión de láser clase 1.Entre los distintos modelosdestacan el reflex polarizado conlente coaxial para detectarobjetos reflectantes, incluso sison transparentes, el palpadorcon supresión de primer planoy/o fondo, el sensor de contrastecon emisión de luz blanca para ladetección de marcas, el sensorde luminiscencia con emisión UVpara la detección de marcasfluorescentes así como modeloscon emisión láser paradetecciones de alta resolución.Para todos los modelos existenversiones con salida NPN o PNPy con conexión normalizada conconector M12 giratorio de cuatroposiciones.
Serie S62Supresión de fondo de altasprestaciones y reflex polarizado
- Sensores con emisión LED o láser - Supresión de fondo de 3 cm a 2 m- Reflex polarizado hasta 20 m - Sensor de distancia entre 40 a 120 mm - Salida NPN/PNP con configuración NO-NC
Serie S90Amplia gama de sensoresfotoeléctricos compactos encarcasa de metal- Supresión de fondo y reflex polarizado- Versiones con láser clase 1 para
largos alcances- Sensores de contraste y luminiscencia
de rayos UV- Carcasa de alta resistencia mecánica- Salida estándar de 4 cables NO-NC
NPN o PNP
Serie S2ZNueva serie de sensoresfotoeléctricos Maxi, ideal paraaplicaciones críticas - Funciones ópticas básicas- Protección mecánica IP67- Funciones de temporizador (ONE-
SHOT, ON/OFF, Delay)- Bloque de conexión con abrazaderas
de muelle para facilitar el cableado
S10
0…18 m
0.1…4 m
0.1…3 m
0.1…0.8 m
1…10 cm1…35 cm0…60 cm
14 mm
10…30
••
•
M18 x 55/67
latonado NIacero inoxidable AISI316L
IP69K
SERIE
0…12 m
0.1…4 m
0.1…3 m
0.1…0.8 m
1…10 cm1…35 cm0…60 cm
15 mm
0…85 mm
0…22 mm
10…3015…264
•••
(•)
••
M18 x 55/68
ABS
IP67
S5
II3
10
SENSORES FOTOELÉCTRICOS UNIVERSALES
Emisor/receptor
Reflex(en reflector R2)
Reflex polarizado (en reflector R2)
Reflex para transparentes (en reflector R2)
Palpador directo
Palpador focalizado
Palpador con supresión de fondo
Palpador consupresión de primer plano
Sensor de distancia
Emisor/receptor de fibra óptica
Palpadorde fibra óptica
Tubulares
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorpig-tail
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
ALC
AN
CE
SD
AT
OS
TÉ
CN
ICO
S
S15
0…20 m
0.1…4 m
0.1…3 m
1…10 cm1…35 cm
12…30
••
•
•M18 x 40
ABS
IP69K
11
S50 S51
0…20 m
0.1…4 m
0.1…3 m
0…10 cm1…45 cm
10…30
••
••
M18 x 55/68
PBTlatonado NI
IP67
0…25 m0…60 m
0.1…4 m
0.1…4 m0.1…16 m
0.1…1.3 m
10 cm
5…10 cm
4…10 cm
5…10 cm
0…100 mm
0…30 mm
10…30
••
0…10 V••
M18 x 55/68
PBTlatonado NI
IP67
cl.1
cl.1
cl.1
SERIE
0…10 cm0…40 cm0…70 cm0…35 cm
II3
12
SENSORES FOTOELÉCTRICOS UNIVERSALES
Emisor/receptor
Reflex(en reflector R2)
Reflex polarizado (en reflector R2)
Reflex para transparentes (en reflector R2)
Palpador directo
Palpador focalizado
Palpador con supresión de fondo
Palpador consupresión de primer plano
Sensor de distancia
Emisor/receptor de fibra óptica
Palpadorde fibra óptica
Tubulares
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
ALC
AN
CE
SD
AT
OS
TÉ
CN
ICO
S
0…60 m
0.03…12 m
0…35 cm
10…30
•
•
M18 x 66
ABS
IP67
2…10 cm4…12 cm
10…30
••
••
M18 x 100 (SDS5)M18 x 80 (SDS10)
ABS (SDS5)latonado NI (SDS10)
IP67
SDS SL5
cl.1
cl.1
cl.1
13
1414
0…2 m
5…150 cm
10…100 cm
10…30
••
•
8 x 23 x 12
policarbonato
IP67
0.1…6 m
0.1…3 m
0.1…2.5 m0.1…6 m
0.1…0.7 m
0.5…30 cm4…15 cm
1.5…10 cm2…6 cm
10…30
••
••
12 x 32 x 20
ABS
IP67
SERIE SMall S40
cl.2
cl.2
cl.2
3…15 mm 3…20 mm3…30 mm3…50 mm
Sensores miniatura y sensores de fibra óptica
SENSORES FOTOELÉCTRICOS UNIVERSALES
Emisor/receptor
Reflex(en reflector R2)
Reflex polarizado (en reflector R2)
Reflex para transparentes (en reflector R2)
Palpador directo
Palpador focalizado
Palpador con supresión de fondo
Palpador consupresión de primer plano
Sensor de distancia
Emisor/receptor de fibra óptica
Palpadorde fibra óptica
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
ALC
AN
CE
SD
AT
OS
TÉ
CN
ICO
S
1515
0.1…6 m
0.1…2.5 m
0.1…0.7 m
0.2…35 cm
110 mm
10…30
••
••
12 x 32 x 20
ABS
IP67
S41
0…15 m
0.05…4 m
0…70 cm5…15 cm
5…25 cm
10…30
••
••
11 x 31 x 19
PC/PBT
IP67
S3Z
0…5 m
0.1…2.5 m
0.1…2 m
0.2…0.8 m
0…10 cm0…50 cm
12 mm
0…110 mm
0…33 mm
10…30
•
•
••
13 x 42 x 29
ABS
IP66
S3SERIE
16
SENSORES FOTOELÉCTRICOS UNIVERSALES
Sensores miniatura y sensores de fibra óptica
Emisor/receptor
Reflex(en reflector R2)
Reflex polarizado (en reflector R2)
Reflex para transparentes (en reflector R2)
Palpador directo
Palpador focalizado
Palpador con supresión de fondo
Palpador consupresión de primer plano
Sensor de distancia
Emisor/receptor de fibra óptica
Palpadorde fibra óptica
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
ALC
AN
CE
SD
AT
OS
TÉ
CN
ICO
S
0...300 mm0...150 mm0...75 mm
0...100 mm0...50 mm0...25 mm
12...24
••
••
10 x 40 x 65
ABS
IP65IP50 (vers. potenciómetro)
S7S8
0…10 m0.1…5 m
0…0.8 m
0…50 cm
2...20 cm5…30 cm
12…30
••
••
14 x 42 x 25
ABS
IP67
cl.2
cl.2
17
0…20 m0…60 m
0…3.2 m (coaxial)0.1…6.5 m0.1…20 m
0…1.7 m (coaxial)
1…100 cm5…200 cm0…60 cm
7…20 cm5…10 cm
7…20 cm
5…15 cm
10…30
••
0…10 V••
15 x 50 x 50
ABS
IP67
SERIE S60
cl.1
cl.1
cl.1
cl.1
Sensores compactos
0…20 m
0.1…6 m
0.1…5 m
0.1…1 m
1…90 cm5…200 cm
0.1…10 cm3…25 cm
10…50 cm
5…20 cm
10…30
15…264•
••
••
18 x 50 x 50
ABS
IP65
S6
18
SENSORES FOTOELÉCTRICOS UNIVERSALES
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
ALC
AN
CE
SD
AT
OS
TÉ
CN
ICO
S
Emisor/receptor
Reflex(en reflector R2)
Reflex polarizado (en reflector R2)
Reflex para transparentes (en reflector R2)
Palpador directo
Palpador focalizado
Palpador con supresión de fondo
Palpador consupresión de primer plano
Sensor de distancia
Emisor/receptor de fibra óptica
Palpadorde fibra óptica
0.5…8.5 m0.3…20 m
30…300 mm60…600 mm
60…1200 mm200…2000 mm
30…150 mm50…350 mm
80 ± 40 mm
10…30
••
••
18 x 50 x 50
ABS
IP67
S62 S90
cl.2
cl.2
cl.2
0…20 m0…60 m
0…3.2 m (coaxial) 0.1…6.5 m0.1…20 m
0…1.7 m (coaxial)
1…100 cm5…200 cm0…60 cm
7…20 cm5…10 cm
7…20 cm
10…30
••
•
15 x 50 x 41
zama
IP67
cl.1
cl.1
cl.1
cl.1
cl.2
19
S2
0…10 m0…50 m
0.1…5 m
0.1…3 m
1…90 cm1…200 cm
10…30
15…264
••
•26 x 58 x 85
PBT
IP66
SERIE
Sensores grandes
0…50 m
0.2…7 m
0…1 m
20…200 cm
12…24
12…240••
•
•25 x 67.5 x 90
PBT
IP67
S2Z
20
SENSORES FOTOELÉCTRICOS UNIVERSALES
Emisor/receptor
Reflex(en reflector R2)
Reflex polarizado (en reflector R2)
Reflex para transparentes (en reflector R2)
Palpador directo
Palpador focalizado
Palpador con supresión de fondo
Palpador consupresión de primer plano
Sensor de distancia
Emisor/receptor de fibra óptica
Palpadorde fibra óptica
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
ALC
AN
CE
SD
AT
OS
TÉ
CN
ICO
S
0.1…50 m
0.1…8 m
0.1…2 m
10…50 cm
10…30
••
•
26 x 65 x 55
ABS
IP66
S20 S30
0…50 m
0.1…10 m
0.05…2 m
20…110 cm
10…30
17…264•
••
••
32 x 85 x 73
policarbonato
IP67
21
22
SENSORESPARA APLICACIONES
Serie SR21 Sensores de herradura en μμPen formato 2 mm paraetiquetado y embalaje
- Alta frecuencia de conmutación de 25 kHz- Modelos con luz infrarroja o luz rojo/verde- Detección de etiquetas semi-
transparentes- Detección de marcas de color en
transparencias- Salida doble de 4 cables NPN y PNP
Serie LD46Nueva línea de sensores deluminiscencia en carcasasstandard de metal
- LED de emisión UV de altasprestaciones
-Alta sensibilidad para marcasfluorescentes
- Distancia de detección de 10 - 100 mm-Frecuencia de conmutación de 2 kHz - Salidas analógicas 0-5 V y NPN/PNP
Serie LD50 Nueva línea de sensores deluminiscencia en carcasas deplástico innovadoras
- LED de emisión UV de altasprestaciones
- Carcasa de plástico innovadora - Distancia de detección 10 mm - Frecuencia de conmutación 2 kHz - Salidas bipolares NPN y PNP
NUEVAS PRESTACIONES NUEVA SERIENUEVA SERIE
Los sensores de herradura dela serie SR21, con un anchode ranura de 2 mm, destacanpor su elevada resolución de12 bit (4096 puntos de ajuste)y por su bajo t iempo derespuesta de tan sólo 20 ms,equivalentes a una frecuenciade conmutación de 25 kHz. Laprogramación del umbral deconmutación se realizaautomáticamente con la simpleactivación de una tecla, o en lamodalidad dinámica durante eldesplazamiento de lasetiquetas u otras referencias adetectar. El modelo SR21-IRcon emisión de luz infrarrojaes apropiado para la detecciónde etiquetas o agujeros endiferentes superficies,mientras que el modelo SR21-RG con doble emisión de luzroja o verde es apropiado parala detección de marcas decolor en películastransparentes en el proceso deembalaje automático.
La nueva serie LD46 desensores de luminiscencia conLED de emisión UV, conalcances de entre 10 a 100mm, ofrece diferentes modelosideales para aplicacionestípicas en la industria. Para laindustria cerámica, se disponede un modelo capaz dedetectar marcas fluorescentes,incluyendo líneas finas o noclaramente marcadas, inclusoen baldosas reflectantes.Modelos de altas prestacionespara la detección de marcasluminiscentes para alcancesmás altos, incluso ensuperficies muy irregulares,están disponibles para lamaquinaria para trabajar lamadera. También se ofreceotro modelo, especialmentedesarrollado para la industriafarmacéutica, para ladetección de etiquetas enfrascos de vidrio u hojas depapel en embalajesfarmacéuticos.
La nueva serie LD50 de sensoresde luminiscencia con LED deemisión UV ha sido desarrolladacomo la solución más eficaz a nivelde coste con altas prestaciones delectura y diseño innovador. ElLD50 está especialmente indicadoen aplicaciones en máquinascompactas, donde sólo se disponede un espacio limitado. La carcasacompacta de plástico asegura suintegración fácil y flexible enmuchos entornos diferentes.Aplicaciones típicas para el LD50se encuentran en la industriafarmacéutica y cosmética paradetectar etiquetas en frascos, o enel empaquetado automático paradetectar papel blanqueado omanchas fluorescentes. Elconector M12 de 4 polos ofreceuna conexión sencilla y rápida.
23
NUEVA SERIE
Serie TL46Nueva línea de sensores decontraste en carcasas standardde metal
- LED de emisión RGB de amplioespectro
- Versión básica, standard o ampliada - Autoajuste manual y dinámico - Frecuencia de conmutación de 30 kHz -Salidas analógicas 0-5V y NPN/PNP
Serie TL50 Nueva línea de sensores decontraste en carcasa deplástico innovadora
- LED de emisión RGB de amplioespectro
- Alcance de 9 mm - Autoajuste automático - Frecuencia de conmutación de 15 kHz - Salidas bipolares NPN y PNP
Serie AS1Minibarreras fotoeléctricasAREAsensor™ de altaresolución
- Sensores de área de rayos cruzados- Altura controlada 100 mm- Alcance hasta 3 m- Objeto mínimo detectable 0.2x75 mm- Salida PNP y ajuste del modo Scan
mode
NUEVA SERIENUEVA SERIE
La nueva línea de sensores decontraste de la serie TL46 estádisponible en 3 versionesdiferentes. La versión básicaTL46-W sólo tiene un botón deajuste, 2 indicadores LED yunas prestaciones optimizadaspara conseguir un rendimientomáximo al precio máscompetit ivo. La versiónstandard TL46-WL de metaltiene 3 botones de control yuna barra de indicación para elajuste manual o automático delos límites, con un excelenterendimiento que alcanza unaresolución de contrastemáxima para la escala del griso de colores, con unafrecuencia de conmutación de20 kHz. La versión ampliadaTL46-WLF ofrece además undisplay de 4 dígitos, con elcual es posible ajustar lasfunciones más avanzadas,consiguiendo un rendimientomáximo, tal como por ejemplouna frecuencia deconmutación de 30 kHz.
Los sensores de contraste sehan convertido en un elementoesencial de los procesos deproducción automáticos. Seutilizan para la detección segu-ra de todo tipo de diferenciasen contrastes. Con un autoa-juste estático de 2 puntos(marca y fondo), el TL50 seajusta directamente en el sen-sor mediante el botón deautoajuste. La emisión RGB(roja, verde y azul) garantizauna seguridad máxima dedetección. Para cada opera-ción de ajuste, el sensor selec-ciona independientemente cuálde los tres diodos de emisióndeberá usar. El diseño com-pacto es la alternativa a precioóptimo para las aplicacionesstandard con buenas presta-ciones de lectura. La carcasacompacta de plástico asegurasu integración fácil y flexible enmuchos entornos de maquina-ria diferentes.
Las minibarreras fotoeléctricasAREAsensorTM de la serie AS1,son sensores de área de rayoscruzados que detectancualquier objeto, condimensiones de hasta 0,2x75mm, dentro de una altura de100 mm y una distancia dehasta 3 m entre el emisor y elreceptor. Los sensores de áreaAS1 son la solución ideal parala detección de objetos, inclusomuy pequeños, que puedenaparecer en distintasposiciones dentro del áreacontrolada. Las barreras ultra-compactas AS1 se prestanperfectamente para el uso enlíneas de cintas o rodil lostransportadores rápidos, asícomo al principio y final delíneas de carga y descargapara la detección y el recuentode objetos, incluso en posiciónirregular.
SERIE
2 mm
40 mm
10 kHz
LED IR
potenciómetro
24 ± 15%
••
•
14 x 68 x 37
aluminio
IP60
SR21 SR22
2 mm
50 mm
25 kHz
LED IRLED rojo / verde
tecla AUTO-SET
10…30
••
•
20 x 90 x 26
zama
IP65
SENSORESPARA APLICACIONES
24
Sensor de herradura
Profundidad ranura
Frecuencia de conmutación
Emisión luminosa
Programación
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPreléotros
Conexión cableconectorbloque terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS
Sensores de herradura
SRF-50 SRF-80 SRF-120SRF-30
30 mm
34 mm
1.5 kHz3 kHz
LED rojoLaser rojo
potenciómetro
10…30
••
•
10 x 50 x 59
aluminio
IP65
120 mm
54 mm
1.5 kHz3 kHz
LED rojoLaser rojo
potenciómetro
10…30
••
•
10 x140 x 84
aluminio
IP65
50 mm
54 mm
1.5 kHz3 kHz
LED rojoLaser rojo
potenciómetro
10…30
••
•
10 x 70 x 79
aluminio
IP65
80 mm
54 mm
1.5 kHz3 kHz
LED rojoLaser rojo
potenciómetro
10…30
••
•
10 x 100 x 79
aluminio
IP65
cl.2
cl.2
cl.2
cl.2
cl.2
cl.2
cl.2
cl.2
25
10…100 mm
2 kHz
LED UV-HP
botones de control SET +/-
15…30
•
0…5 V••
31 x 81 x 58
aluminio
IP67
10…100 mm
0...30 mm
2 kHz
LED UV
botones de control MARK y BACKGROUND
10…30
••
0…7 V••
31 x 81 x 58
zama
IP67
SERIE LDμμ LD46
SENSORESPARA APLICACIONES
26
Sensor de luminiscencia
Sensor de luminiscencia con fibra óptica
Frecuencia de conmutación
Emisión de luz
Ajuste
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
Sensores de luminiscencia
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS
LD50 S90-U S60-U S50-U
0…40 mm
2 kHz
LED UV
boton de control SET
10…30
••
•
15 x 50 x 41
zama
IP67
0…40 mm
2 kHz
LED UV
boton de control SET
10…30
••
••
15 x 50 x 50
ABS
IP67
8…20 mm
1 kHz
LED UV
boton de control SET
10…30
••
••
M18 x 55/68
PBTNI plated brass
IP67
0…60 mm
2 kHz
LED UV-HP
botones de control +/-
15…30
•
•
31 x 81 x 53
ABS
IP67
27
SERIE
6…60 mm
15 kHz20 kHz30 kHz
LED RGB
botones de control SET +/-
10…30
•
0…5 V••
31 x 81 x 58
aluminio
IP67
6…60 mm
0…3 mm0…10 mm
10 kHz20 kHz
LED rojo/verdeLED blanco
botones de control MARK y BACKGROUND
10…30
••
0…5 V••
31 x 81 x 58
zama
IP67
TLμμ TL46
SENSORESPARA APLICACIONES
28
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorpig-tail
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
Sensor de contraste
Sensor de contraste con fibra óptica
Sensor de color
Frecuencia de conmutación
Emisión de luz
Interface de serie
Ajuste
Sensores de contraste y color
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS
S65-V
5…45 mm
1.5 kHz (V09 vers.)500 Hz (V19 vers.)
LED RGB
RS485
botones de control SET y SEL
10…30
••
•
50 x 50 x 25
ABS
IP67
12…20 mm
30 kHz
LED blanco
RS485
botones de control SET +/-
10…30
••
0…5 V
•
50 x 50 x 25
ABS
IP67
9 mm
15 kHz
LED RGB
botones de control MARK y BACKGROUND
10…30
•
•
31 x 81 x 53
ABS
IP67
TL50 S65-W S8-W
10 mm
10 kHz
LED RGB
Teach-in
12…30
••
••
14 x 42 x 25
ABS
IP67
29
SERIE
100 mm
0.2 x 200 mm Ø18 mm
500 Hz
LED IR
0.3...1.9 m0.8...3 m
10…30
•
•
20 x 41 x 150
aluminio
IP67
AS1-HR AS1-SR
100 mm
0.2 x 75 mm Ø 6 mm
500 Hz
LED IR
0.3...1.9 m0.8...3 m
10…30
•
•
20 x 41 x 150
aluminio
IP67
SENSORESPARA APLICACIONES
30
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS
Sensores de área
Sensor de área
Sensor de línea
Precisión
Resolución
Frecuencia de conmutación
Emisión luminosa
Interface de serie
Alcance
150 mm
0.9 mm
0.15 mm
>130 Hz
LED IR
RS485
200 mm
10…30
••
4…20 mA
•
25 x 50 x 50
ABS
IP67
S65-Z
31
SENSORES FOTOELÉCTRICOS
32
Reflectores para ser utilizadosjunto con los sensoresfotoeléctricos con reflex deemisión de luz infrarroja ovisible roja, también polarizada.Amp l ia gama ded imens iones , fo rmas yfijaciones.
- Reflectores estándar R2 y R5 de 48mm y 75 mm de diámetrorespectivamente.
- Reflectores R4 y R6 de alta eficaciapara el uso con mayores alcances.
- Reflectores R7, R8 y R20 demicroprismas para sensores deemisión láser para las detecciones dealta resolución.Protección IP 67 y temperatura deservicio de –30°C hasta 70°C.
- Película reflectante autoadhesiva,recortable según la forma y lasdimensiones deseadas, también enversión para luz polarizada.
Gama completa de fibrasópticas de plástico parafunciones de emisor/receptor ypalpador, también coaxial.Terminales recortables yconectables a sensores quelleven los agujeros de conexióncorrespondientes de 2,2 mm dediámetro. La gama ofrecelentes de focalización ydesviación, protectoresmetálicos, adaptadores de 1 a2,2 mm de diámetro y unaherramienta para cortar la fibra.
- Fibras para altas temperaturas hasta125°C.
- Fibras de alta flexibilidad con rayosdesviados de solo 2 mm.
- Fibras de alta eficacia, con cable enespiral extensible hasta 2 m y cablefino de 1 mm de diámetro exterior.
Fibras ópticas de versiónavanzada para aplicacionescríticas. Todas las fibras tienenterminales recortables. Serecomiendan para el uso consensores de alta resolución dela serie S7.
- Fibras con alineación de fibras enrayos paralelos para la detección conpalpador o emisor/receptor.
- Fibras de palpador focalizado conlente axial, radial o lateral, también sepuede utilizar la supresión de fondo.
- Versión de palpador con lente a 90°i n t eg rada en un d i áme t ro de3,8 mm.
SERIE R SERIE OF SERIES OFA
Accesorios
Reflectores Fibras ópticas universales
Fibras ópticas paraaplicaciones específicas
33
Todos los conectores vienenprecableados con configuraciónnormalizada de 4 polos concable de 3, 5, 7 o 10 metros delongitud.Conectores M12 disponiblestambién con configuraciónnormalizada de 3 polos NO ocon LED amarillo de indicaciónpara salidas tipo PNP y LEDverde para la alimentación.Carcasa del conector deplástico PUR y cable de PVCcon grado de autoextinción,según la norma CEI 20-22.
Gama completa de soportes defi jación para sensoresuniversales.Soportes de plástico o metalpara sensores tubulares M18fijos o con regulación del ejeóptico del sensor hasta unángulo de 15° en todas lasdirecciones.Elevada resistencia a golpes yvibraciones.
Alimentadores para sensoresfotoeléctricos de baja tensión ofinal de carrera inductivos ocapacitativos.
- Posibilidad de configurar las señalesde salida con funciones lógicas y detemporización.
- Ajuste individual o doble paraNPN/PNP, relé o sensores analógicos 0-10V.
- Función de temporización: retardo ONy/o OFF, monoestable, biestable.
- Panel de mandos con potenciómetropara la regulación de la sensibilidadde los ajustes y la temporización,también contiene LED's indicativos dela alimentación y del estado de losajustes y las salidas.
SERIE CS SERIE ST SERIE PSCU
Conectores Soportes de fijación Alimentadores
34
SENSORES DE PROXIMIDADINDUCTIVOS
NUEVOS MODELOS
Los sensores inductivosrepresentan una solucióncomplementaria a los sensoresfotoeléctricos en aplicacionesbasadas en la reflexión ytransmisión selectiva de la luz.Mediante la aplicación detensión al equipo se crea uncampo magnético alternante,generado por una bobinaosciladora delante de susuperficie óptica activa. Si unobjeto metálico (hierro,aluminio, cobre, latón, etc.)penetra en este campo,disminuye la velocidad deloscilador e invierte el umbralde disparo causando uncambio de estado de la salida.Los sensores inductivospueden ser uti l izados, porejemplo, en la detección sincontacto de elementosexclusivamente metálicos.
Serie ISSensores de proximidadinductivos
- Carcasas tubulares M4 a M30- Versiones en acero inoxidable AISI 316L- Distancia de detección 1 a 20 mm- 10-30 Vcc, versiones de 2, 3 o 4
cables con configuración NPN/PNP- 24-230 Vca, versiones de 2 cables
35
Alcance
Repetibilidad
Histéresis
Ondulación
Frecuencia de conmutación
Indicadores
0.8 mm
≤ 1%
< 10%
≥ 10%
2000 Hz
LED amarillo
10 … 30, 3 cables
•
••
Estándar
Acero inoxidable AISI-316L
IP67
2 mm, modelos blindados3 mm, modelos no blindados
≤ 3%
< 10%
≥ 10%
1000 Hz
LED amarillo
10 … 30, 3 cables
•
•••
EstándarCorto
Latón niquelado
IP67
SERIE M4/M5 M8
Sensores de proximidad inductivos
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS
Alimentación VccVcaVca/Vcc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
36
Sensores de proximidad inductivos
Alcance
Repetibilidad
Histéresis
Ondulación
Frecuencia de conmutación
Indicadores
Tensión de alimentación VccVcaVca/Vcc
Salida 2 cables NA/NC3 cables NPN/PNP NA/NC4 cables NPN/PNPNA+NC4 cables, programablesOtros
Conexiones CableConector M8Conector M12
Carcasa
Material de la carcasa
Protección mecánica
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS
2 mm, modelos blindados3 mm, modelos no blindados
≤ 3%
< 10%
≥ 10%
500 Hz
LED amarillo
10 ... 30, 2 cables
•
•••
EstándarCorto
Latón niquelado
IP67
2 mm, modelos blindados4 mm, modelos no blindados
≤ 3%
< 10%
≥ 10%
1000 Hz
LED amarillo
10 ... 30, 2, 3 and 4 cables
••••
•••
EstándarCorto
Latón niqueladoAcero inoxidable AISI-316L
IP67
SERIE M8 2X M12
SENSORES DE PROXIMIDADINDUCTIVOS
37
5 mm, modelos blindados8 mm, modelos no blindados
≤ 3%
< 10%
≥ 10%
1000 Hz
LED amarillo
10 ... 30, 2, 3 and 4 cables
••••
•••
EstándarCorto
Latón niqueladoAcero inoxidable AISI-316L
IP67
M18 2X4 mm, modelos blindados
8 mm, modelos no blindados
≤ 3%
< 10%
≥ 10%
500 Hz
LED amarillo
10 ... 30, 2, 3 and 4 cables
••••
•••
EstándarCorto
Latón niqueladoAcero inoxidable AISI-316L
IP67
M188 mm, modelos blindados
14 mm, modelos no blindados
≤ 3%
< 10%
≥ 10%
400 Hz
LED amarillo
10 ... 30, 2, 3 and 4 cables
••••
•••
EstándarCorto
Latón niqueladoAcero inoxidable AISI-316L
IP67
M12 2X
38
Sensores de proximidad inductivos
Alcance
Repetibilidad
Histéresis
Ondulación
Frecuencia de conmutación
Indicadores
Tensión de alimentación VccVcaVca/Vcc
Salida 2 cables NA/NC3 cables NPN/PNP NA/NC4 cables NPN/PNPNA+NC4 cables, programablesOtros
Conexiones CableConector M8Conector M12
Carcasa
Material de la carcasa
Protección mecánica
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS
10 mm, modelos blindados15 mm, modelos no blindados
≤ 3%
< 10%
≥ 10%
300 Hz
LED amarillo
10 ... 30, 2,3 and 4 cables
••••
•••
EstándarCorto
Latón niquelado
IP67
15 mm, modelos blindados20 mm, modelos no blindados
≤ 3%
< 10%
≥ 10%
200 Hz
LED amarillo
10 ... 30, 2,3 and 4 cables
••••
•••
EstándarCorto
Latón niquelado
IP67
SERIE M30 M30 2X
SENSORES DE PROXIMIDADINDUCTIVOS
39
40
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE MEDICIÓN
Serie DS1Barreras de medida y detecciónAREAscan™ con salidaanalógica- Medida de dimensiones o posición de
objetos- Resolución 4 mm y tiempo de respuesta 1 ms- Alturas controladas de 100 a 300 mm- Alcance hasta 4 m- Salidas PNP y analógica 0-10 V
Serie DS2Barreras de medida ydetección AREAscan™ coninterface de serie- Manipulación automática de material- Versiones con resolución 6 o 25 mm- Alturas controladas de 150 a 1650 mm- Alcance hasta 10 m- Salida PNP, 0-10 V y de serie RS485
Serie USSensores ultrasonido
- Carcasa tubular estándar M18 o M30- Emisión axial o radial- Salidas digitales NPN y PNP- Salidas analógicas 4-20 mA o 0-10 V- Alta resolución
NUEVAS PRESTACIONES NUEVAS PRESTACIONESNUEVOS MODELOS
Las barreras AREAscanTM de laserie DS1 son barrerascompactas de múltiples rayosaptas para la detección ymedida de las dimensiones o laposición de un objeto. Estándisponibles en modelos conaltura controlada de 100, 150 o300 mm, resolución de medidade 4 mm y alcance de hasta 4m. La electrónica estácompletamente integrada enlas barreras, por lo tanto no esnecesario ningún controlexterno. La medida se realiza através de la salida analógica de0 a 10 V de forma proporcionalal número de rayosinterrumpidos, mientras que lasalida PNP se activa cada vezque se interrumpe por lomenos un rayo entre el emisory receptor. El bajo tiempo derespuesta, de 1 a menos de 3ms, según la altura y laresolución de medida, permitesu instalación incluso enmáquinas y procesos muyrápidos.
La familia AREAscanTM de laserie DS2 abarca alturascontroladas de 15 a 165 cm,con alcances de 5 m para lasversiones con resolución de 6mm o 10 m para las versionescon resolución de 25 mm. Laconfiguración de medida puedeser programada manualmente,gracias a selectores internos opor medio de un interfacegráfico desde un PC externocon puerto de serie. Una vezcargado el programa en lamemoria flash, el dispositivooperará en el modo stand-alone. El interface de seriepermite también transmitir losdatos medidos en códigobinario o ASCII, controlar elestado de funcionamiento yprogramar distintos valores develocidad de transmisión. Lasbarreras DS2 están previstaspara aplicaciones de mediciónde alturas o dimensiones engeneral durante eldesplazamiento automático dematerial.
La gama de sensores ultrasonidoM18 y M30 de la serie US ofreceversiones con emisión acústicaradial o axial para los modelosM18 y sólo radial para losmodelos M30, con salida digitalNPN/PNP o analógica 4-20 mA /0-10 V. Las principalescaracterísticas son su bajo tiempode respuesta de sólo 5 ms y sualta resolución de hasta 0,5 mm.Los sensores son ajustables auna o más distancias utilizando elpulsador autoajuste para el controlde distancia o presencia de hasta2000 mm, con supresión de fondoy de primer plano. Los sensoresde ultrasonido detectan todos loselementos, independientementede su transparencia, color y tipode material no fonoabsorbente,tanto en aplicaciones de embalajeautomático como también en laindustria automovilística ymanufacturera en general.
41
Serie S80Sensores de distancia conmedida del tiempo de telémetroy emisión láser
- Emisión Láser visible rojo de clase 2- Medición por palpador directo hasta 4 o
7 m- Medición por reflex hasta 20 o 100 m- Alta precisión y velocidad de medida- Salida NPN/PNP, de 4-20 mA y de serie
RS485
Serie S81Sensor de distancia de óptimarelación coste-prestaciones
- Emisión láser de luz roja visible de laclase 2
-Carcasa de plástico y lentes - Medición por palpador directo hasta 4 m - 2 salidas digitales PNP/NPN - Una salida analógica 0-10 V o salida
de alarma
Serie S62-YSensor de distancia de altaresolución
- Alcance 80 ± 40 mm - Resolución hasta 8 μm- Linealidad <0,1%- Oscilaciones de temperatura < 10 μm/Cº- Punto de 0,5 x 1 mm a la distancia
de focalización
NUEVAS PRESTACIONES NUEVA SERIE NUEVOS MODELOS
Los sensores de distancia de laserie S80 se basan en latecnología del telémetro que semide entre la emisión y larecepción de impulsos láser declase 2. Los sensores S80-Y0 yYL0 funcionan con palpadordirecto hasta 4 m, o de formaescalonada hasta 7 m, para ladeterminación de la posición obien detección de objetos, consupresión de fondo de dobleumbral y altos alcances. Lossensores S80-Y1 y Y2, conalcances de hasta 20 o 100 m,funcionan con reflex que midenla distancia desde el reflectorhasta el objeto a detectar, paraaplicaciones deposicionamiento en depósitosautomáticos o líneas condesplazamiento automático engeneral. Existen dos salidasNPN o PNP programables adistintas distancias. La medidase transmite a través de lasalida 4-20 mA, el puerto deserie RS485 y display de 4dígitos al panel del sensor.
La serie S81 es la línea de óptimarelación coste-prestaciones para lossensores de medición de distancia. ElS81 se basa en la tecnología deltelémetro que garantiza una altaprecisión y velocidad de medición. ElS81 trabaja como un sensor deproximidad directa hasta 4 m para elposicionamiento de un objeto o lasupresión de fondo a larga distancia.El ajuste del sensor es muy rápidogracias a dos botones, uno por cadasalida digital. El producto estádisponible en dos modelos diferentes:uno ofrece una salida analógicaproporcional al resultado de lamedición de distancia, el otro permiteal usuario recibir una señal de alarmasegún las condiciones defuncionamiento de la lente. La versiónS81-Y tiene una salida analógica 0-10V regulable, la cual permiteconfigurar la distancia mínima ymáxima de ejecución, además deasociar el mínimo y máximo voltaje.La serie S81 ofrece una solucióncompetitiva para almacenesautomáticos, controles de acceso, laindustria de la madera y aplicacionesen parkings.
La nueva serie S62-Y, basadaen la tecnología de latriangulación óptica, ofreceuna medición de distancia dealta precisión. La emisión deluz es un láser rojo de la clase2, y el receptor está basado enun componente CCD quegarantiza una alta inmunidadcontra las reflexiones típicasde objetos brillantes y nouniformes. El S62-Y estáespecialmente indicado paraaplicaciones muy rápidas dehasta 1 kHz. El resultado de lamedición se obtiene gracias alas salidas analógicas de 4-20mA o 0-10 V o el puerto deserie RS485. El protocolo deserie también permite unajuste remoto del equipo através del PC con el interfaceGraphic User. Las aplicacionestípicas se encuentran en laindustria de la madera para elcontrol de los productoselaborados, en la industriametalúrgica, en elposicionamiento en cadenasde montaje y en aplicacionesde completaje de piezas.
Barrera de medición (altura controlada)
Sensor de línea (altura controlada)
Sensor de ultrasonido
Resolución
Número de rayos
Emisión luminosa
Tiempo de respuesta
Interface de serie
Programación
Alcance
Histéresis
100…300 mm
4...10 mm
16…48
IR
1…2.75 ms
Potenciómetro
0.15...0.8 m 0.15...2.1 m
0.2...4 m
24
•
0. . . 10 V
M12 4 polos para TX / M12 5 polos para RX
20 x 41
aluminio
IP65
150…1650 mm
6/25 mm
21…231 (res=6mm)18…36 (res=25mm)
IR
5…90 ms
RS485
Interruptores DIPInterfaz gráfica
0.3...5 m
24
•
0. . . 10 V
M12 4 polos para TX / M12 8 polos para RX
35 x 40
aluminio
IP65
SERIE DS1 DS2
Haces cruzados, sensoresde línea y ultrasonido
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE MEDICIÓN
42
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
150…600 mm
0.5/0.8 mm (rayos cruzados)6 mm (rayos paralelos)
24. . .96
IR
3…12 ms (rayos cruzados)23…92 ms (rayos paralelos)
Autoajuste
0.2...1.5 m
24
•
0. . . 10 V
M12 4 polos para TX / M12 8 polos para RX
35 x 40
aluminio
IP65
DS3 S65-Z
150 mm
0.15 mm
1(reflex)
IR
3.8 ms
RS485
Teach-in
200 mm
10…30
•
4…20mA
M12 8 polos
25 x 50 x 50
ABS
IP67
US18
43
± 1 mm (2.5 ms)± 0.5 mm (30 ms)
Teach-in
30 ... 300 mm
0.7 mm
10…30
•
4…20mA / 0 ... 10 V
M12 5-polig
18x91 (axial)18x95 (radial)
Poliéster
IP67
0,1 % de distancia
Teach-in
200 ... 1000 mm300 ... 2000 mm
2 mm
10…30
•
4…20mA / 0 ... 10 V
M12 5 polos
30 x 63.6 x 45
Poliéster
IP67
US30
0.3. . . 4 m
0.9 mm
0.3 %
100 Hz (Normal)500 Hz (Fast)
Láser rojo
5 ms (Normal)1 ms (Fast)
RS485
Autoajuste
15. . . 30
•
4…20 mA
M12 8 polos
34 x 90 x 73
aluminio
IP67
0.3. . . 7 m
0.4 mm
0.3 %
100 Hz
Láser rojo
5 ms
RS485
Autoajuste
15. . . 30
•
4…20 mA
M12 8 polos
34 x 90 x 73
aluminio
IP67
SERIE
cl.2 cl.2
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE MEDICIÓN
S80-Y0 S80-YL0
44
Sensores de distancia
Sensor de distancia
Resolución digital
Linealidad
Frecuencia de conmutación
Emisión luminosa
Tiempo de respuesta
Interface de serie
Programación
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS
0.3. . . 100.3 m(en reflectores R80)
6 mm
0.15 %
100 Hz (Normal)500 Hz (Fast)
Láser rojo
5 ms (Normal)1 ms (Fast)
RS485
Autoajuste
15. . . 30
•
4…20 mA
M12 8 polos
34 x 90 x 73
aluminio
IP67
0.3. . . 20.3 m(en reflectores R80)
0.6 mm
0.25 %
100 Hz (Normal)500 Hz (Fast)
Láser rojo
5 ms (Normal)1 ms (Fast)
RS485
Autoajuste
15. . . 30
•
4…20 mA
M12 8 polos
34 x 90 x 73
aluminio
IP67
80 ± 40 mm
< 50 μm
< 0.1%
1 KHz
Láser rojo
1 ms
RS485
Autoajuste
12…24
0…10 V o 4...20 mA
M12 8 polos
18 x 50 x 50
ABS
IP67
cl.2 cl.2
0.3…4 m
0.9 mm
80 Hz
Láser rojo
6 ms
Autoajuste
30 mm (Modelos M)
15…30
••
0…10 V
M12 5 polos
58 x 31 x 31
ABS
IP67
cl.2 cl.2
S81S80-Y2 S62-YS80-Y1
45
46
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE INSPECCIÓN
Serie SVS1 El sensor de visión plug-and-play más rápido
- Sensor de visión compacto- Rápido ajuste mediante unidad VSC - No se necesita PC - Monitorización a tiempo real - Inspección con control individual
Serie SVS2 El sensor stand alone convisión de extrema precisión
- Ajuste flexible mediante PC - Conexión Ethernet - Herramientas de reconocimiento o
identificación de objetos - 360° pattern matching - Inspecciones de control múltiple
Serie SCS1 Sensor de cámara de visiónartificial de aplicación universal
- Sensor de imágenes CMOS 640x480 - Iluminador integrado o externo - Medición, control e inspección - OCR/OCV, DataMatrix y código de
barras - Puerto Ethernet y RS232 / RS485
La serie SVS1 es la solución másfácil para aplicaciones de visión enmaquinaria. El SVS1 se basa en elconcepto de un sensor de visióncompacto totalmente integrado en lamáquina. El ajuste es muy rápido eintuitivo, gracias a la unidad VSC, launidad de configuración externa conun display de color de 3,5” y susbotones de control. No se necesitaPC para la configuración. Elprocesamiento de la imagen serealiza por completo dentro delmismo sensor, que es capaz detrabajar en el modo stand alonedespués del ajuste. La unidad VSCpuede suministrar una monitorizacióna tiempo real de las imágenes, sinembargo no es necesario su usodurante el funcionamiento del sensor.Se puede desconectar y utilizar paraajustar varios sensores. El sensorSVS1 permite un control de cadaimagen individual, al mismo tiempoofrece diversas herramientas parasolucionar diferentes tareas: laorientación del producto en la cintatransportadora, la presencia/ausenciaen cadenas de montaje o controlesde sobreimpresión en maquinaria deempaquetado
La serie SVS2 de sensores de visiónofrece todas las característicasnecesarias para solucionar cualquierproblema de visión artificial de maquinariade forma flexible e intuitiva. El ajuste delSVS2 se realiza en un PC utilizando unaconexión Ethernet, asegurando un altonivel de flexibilidad. El interface GraphicUser, basado en un sistema Wizard,conduce al usuario paso a paso durantela creación de la inspección. Existendiferentes modelos según las diferentesherramientas de software:Reconocimiento de Objetos,Reconocimiento Avanzado de Objetos(con pattern matching de 360º) yherramientas de Identificación (código debarras, Datamatrix y OCV). El sensor escapaz de guardar hasta 20 inspeccionesdiferentes que pueden ser seleccionadasmediante pulsaciones digitales o a travésde Ethernet. El sensor es capaz derealizar en paralelo diferentes controlesdel mismo objeto, reduciendo de estaforma el tiempo y coste de instalación,sustituyendo así el trabajo de variosequipos para una misma aplicación. Laserie SVS2 es la solución correctacuando los sensores fotoeléctricosnormales no se adaptan a lasnecesidades de la aplicación.Representa una alternativa de aplicaciónfácil y óptima relación coste-prestación alos sistemas de visión tradicionales.
La cámara de visión artificialSCS1 ofrece todas lasfunciones de un sistema devisión, junto con la sencillez ylos costes de un sensoravanzado. Se dispone demúltiples funciones de control:medición, inspección,reconocimiento de caracteres ylectura de códigos. Los nuevosmodelos de “identif icación”ofrecen funciones de lectura yverif icación de códigos, yfunciones de OCR/OCV, decódigo de barras y deDataMatrix. El i luminadorpuede ser integrado o externo.El sensor puede serconfigurado mediante un PCmaestro a través de un puertoEthernet y trabajar en el modostand-alone. Hay dos salidasPNP activadas según lainspección, entradasconfigurables e interfaces deserie RS232 y RS485 en elconector M12 standard de 8polos. Las lentes CS standardo la óptica con rosca tipo C sonintercambiables.
NUEVA SERIE NUEVA SERIE NUEVAS PRESTACIONES
47
Serie SILIluminadores para la visiónartificial y para la aplicación enel área industrial- Modelos lineales, en forma de anillo o
puntuales- Versiones de luz continua o estroboscópica- LED de luz roja, azul, verde, blanca o
infrarroja- Carcasa de alta resistencia mecánica- Emisión LED Laser visible
NUEVAS PRESTACIONES
Los sólidos iluminadores de laserie SIL han sido concebidospara ofrecer una gamacompleta de soluciones para lai luminación en laautomatización industrial, lavisión artificial en la lectura decódigos y la inspección visualen microscopios. Estándisponibles modelos lineales,en forma de anillo o puntuales,y también para la iluminacióndesde arriba o desde atrás delobjeto. Según las distintasexigencias se pueden montarLED's de luz roja, azul, verde,blanca o infrarroja, así comolentes con distintos ángulos deemisión. También estándisponibles versiones de luzcontinua o estroboscópica, conuna unidad de control especial.La carcasa compacta de metalgarantiza una elevadaprotección mecánica, laconexión es simple y rápida através del conector estándarM8 de 4 polos.
SERIE
Cámara inteligente
640 x 480
hasta 150
iintegrado o externo con conectorM8
Ethernet
RS232 / RS485
USEasy® PC GUI
stand-alone
óptica con rosca tipo C o CS
medida e inspección
24
•
M12 8 polos / M8 4 polos / RJ45
75 x 100 x 40
aluminio
IP40
SCS1
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE INSPECCIÓN
48
Sensores de cámara inteligente
Categoría
Resolución
Frecuencia de imágenes por segundo
Iluminador
Conexión
Interface de serie
Configuración
Funcionamiento
Lentes
Funciones
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS
Iluminadores
Modelos
Driver
Fuente de luz
Lentes
Emisión de luz
Ángulos de emisión
Señal estroboscópica
Intensidad de luz a 500 mm
Clase de láser
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
SERIE
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS
SILSIL
Line - Area - Ring - Spot -Back
integrado o externo
LED de potencia
DATASENSOR Power Optics
rojo / verde / azul / blanco / IR
6° - 25° - 45° - 10x30°
5…24 Vcc
250. . .1000 lux
24
M8 4 polos
aluminio
IP65
Láser
integrado
Láser 650 nm
rojo
60°
0…30 Vcc
5 mW
5…24
M12 4 polos
aluminio
IP65
cl.3
49
Sensor de visión
640 x 480
60
integrado
Ethernet
RS485
Interface de usuario PC Graphic
stand-alone
6/8/12 mm
Reconocimiento de objetoso identificación
24
•
M12 8 polos / M12 4 polos
52 x 58 x 40
aluminio/plástico
IP54
SERIE SVS1 SVS2
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE INSPECCIÓN
50
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (triac)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS
Sensores de visión artificial
Categoría
Resolución
Frecuencia de imágenes por segundo
Iluminador
Conexión
Interface de serie
Configuración
Funcionamiento
Lentes
Funciones
Sensor de visión
640 x 480
60
integrado
Ethernet
RS485
Interface de usuario PC Graphic
stand-alone
6/8/12 mm
Reconocimiento de objetoso identificación
24
•
M12 8 polos / M12 4 polos
52 x 58 x 40
aluminio/plástico
IP54
SERIE VSC
3.5“ TFT LCD
ajuste del sensor SVS1monitorización a tiempo real
320x240
en DIN-Rail o panel
8 botones de control8 LED's de señalización
vía sensor SVS1
M12 8 polos
96 x 96 x40
plástico
IP54
VSM
3.5“ TFT LCD
monitorización del sensor SVS2
320x240
en DIN-Rail o panel
8 botones de control8 LED's de señalización
24
n° 2 M12 8 polos
96 x 96 x40
plástico
IP54
51
Display
Funciones
Resolución
Montaje
Interface de usuario
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS
Alimentación VccVcaVca/cc
Salida PNPNPNNPN/PNPrelé (SCR)otros
Conexión cableconectorbloques terminal
Dimensiones (mm)
Material carcasa
Protección mecánica
Configuradores y monitores
52
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE SEGURIDAD
Serie SE4Barreras fotoeléctricas deprotección SAFEasy™ de Tipo 4- Básica y Plus
- Alturas controladas de 150 a 1650 mm - Resolución 14, 20, 30, 35 mm o 2, 3, 4
rayos- Protección de dedos, manos o cuerpo- Versiones con funciones Blanking y
EDM- Versiones maestro/esclavo en cascada y
EDM
Serie SE4RBarreras de luz reflexSAFEasy™ del Tipo 4
- Altura controlada de 500 mm - Modelos de 2 rayos para la protección
del cuerpo - Unidad pasiva con espejos o reflectores - Alcance de hasta 7,5 m (versión lineal) o
hasta 3 m (versiones en ‘L’ y ‘T’) - Versiones en ‘L’ y ‘T’ con sensores
Muting integrados
Serie SE4T-LBarreras fotoeléctricas deseguridad SAFEasy™ de Tipo 4T/L Muting
- Alturas controladas de 500 o 800 mm- Modelo de 2 o 3 rayos para la protección
del cuerpo- Sensores y lámpara de Muting integrados- Sistema en forma de L (dirección única)
o en forma de T (dos direcciones)- Modelo lineal para sensores Muting externos
NUEVOS MODELOS NUEVA SERIE NUEVAS PRESTACIONES
La serie SE4 ofrece la gama másamplia de barreras de proteccióndel tipo 4, desde las versionesestándar Básica hasta las versionesPlus con las funciones adicionalesBlanking, Maestro y esclavo encascada y EDM. Están disponiblesmodelos para alturas controladasdesde 150 a 1650 mm;resoluciones 14, 20, 30 o 35 para laprotección de dedos o manos y de2, 3 o 4 rayos para la protección delcuerpo. Las barreras permiten laconfiguración del reinicio (Restart) ydel Muting con selectoresprotegidos por hw y sw. La funciónFixed Blanking o Floating Blankingpermite la supresión de la detecciónde objetos en posición fija o enmovimiento repetitivo dentro delárea de detección. Las versionesMaestro y Esclavo pueden serconectadas en cascada, montandopor ejemplo sistemas de barrerasverticales y horizontales en formade ‘L’. Mediante el EDM es posiblecontrolar también el relé externo.
La barrera de luz reflex del tipo 4de la serie SE4-R está formadapor una unidad activa SE4-RA1 yuna unidad pasiva con reflectoresintegrados en la barrera de luzSE4-RDB, o bien con dosespejos de desviación SE4-RSM(accesorios). La altura dedetección es de 500 mm y elalcance es de hasta 7,5 m para laversión lineal, o de 3 m para lasversiones en ‘L’ y ‘T’. Lasfunciones Restart, EDM y Mutingestán integradas y se puedenseleccionar mediante dip-switches en la unidad activa. Lasversiones en ‘L’ y ‘T’ estánprevistas para aplicaciones en lasque se necesita la funciónMuting. Las barreras de luzSE4-R representan unaalternativa segura y efectiva aprecio óptimo a las barreras deluz con unidades activas tanto enel lado emisor como en elreceptor, gracias a su costereducido y su rápida instalación,al igual que la ventaja delcableado que sólo hace falta parala unidad activa.
Las barreras de protección detipo 4 de la serie SE4T-Lcomprenden la función Muting,ya que llevan los sensorescorrespondientes integrados,cableados y alineados de serie.Existen versiones con sensoresintegrados en forma de T para elMuting en dos direcciones (bi-direccional), en forma de L parael Muting en una única dirección(uni-direccional), o Lineal para laconexión de sensores externos.Existen modelos con 2 o 3 rayosde protección, con alturas dedetección de 500 y 800 mm yalcances de hasta 3 m para lasversiones con forma de T y de L yde 25 m para la versión lineal.Características comunes entodos los modelos son la lámparade Muting integrada en la barreray la configuración medianteselectores de protección con hwy sw. El Muting es una funciónnecesaria cuando un materialpasa a través de una zonapeligrosa, como por ejemplo enlos paletizadores/despaletizadores.
NUEVA SERIE
La nueva serie de barreras de luzSAFEasyTM SG4-B amplía lagama actual de modelos SG yrepresenta una evolución de la serieSE4-PLUS, ofreciendo una barrerade seguridad del tipo 4 para laprotección de dedos con funcionesbásicas. Ideal para aplicacionesdonde no se requieren funcionescomplementarias, tal como elMuting, la conexión en cascada o elBlanking. Su tiempo de respuesta yalcance optimizados con respecto ala serie SE4-PLUS distinguen estanueva serie y la convierten en unade las mejores barreras de luzactualmente disponibles en elmercado. Todos los modelos, conalturas desde 150 a 1800 mm,tienen una resolución de 14 y 30mm para la protección de dedos ymanos. La función EDM puede serfácilmente activada mediante elselector correspondiente, igual quela función Restart con configuraciónmanual o automática. El display de7 segmentos facilita al usuario lalectura de los mensajes dediagnóstico y la alineación delproducto.
53
Serie SG2Las barreras fotoeléctricas deseguridad SAFEasy™ ofrecenla mejor relación coste -prestaciones
- 2 modelos : BASE y EXTENDED - Resolución 30, 50 y 90 mm - Alcance hasta 19 m y alturas
controladas hasta 1800 mm- Funciones plus para los modelos
EXTENDED: EDM, Sistema Anti-Interferencia, ReinicioManual/Automático seleccionable
Serie SG4Barreras de luz SAFEasy™ tipo 4con funciones básicas
- Resolución: 14 y 30 mm- Alcance de hasta 19 m (en la versión
de 30 mm) y altura controlada dehasta 1800 mm
- Funciones integradas para el modelobásico tipo 4: EDM, reiniciomanual/automático
NUEVA SERIE
La nueva serie de barreras deseguridad Tipo 2 SG2representa la evolución naturalde la serie SF2. Los dosmodelos SG2-B ‘Base’ y SG2-E ’Extended’ garantizan lamáxima compatibilidad con laserie SF2 (SG2-B) yproporcionan funcioneselevadas para una barrera deTipo 2, como EDM y Anti-Interferencia (SG2-E). Lasprincipales características sonel alcance hasta 19 m, unaaltura controlada de 150 a1800 mm, tiempos derespuesta entre los mejores enel mercado, así como unnuevo perfil más funcional.Además, el producto sesuministra con los nuevossoportes giratorios quefacil i tan y reducen lasoperaciones de alineación delas unidades Emisora yReceptora, incluso para laslargas distancias y enaplicaciones con espejos dedesviación.
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE SEGURIDAD
* Distancia máxima seleccionable: 9 m o 19 m
PUNTO DE PROTECCIÓN OPERATIVA
TYPE 2
SE2-35SF2-30
SG2-B-30 / SG2-E-30
SE2-35SF2-30
SG2-B-30 / SG2-E-30
ESPORÁDICA / CORTA
RIESGO EVITABLERIESGO EVITABLE
FRECUENTE / LARGA
NOSI
TIP0 4
SI NO
TIPO 2
Atención: La información brindada es indicativa y sintética, es obligatorio para referirse a la completa la norma EN 954 para una correcta y la evaluación del riesgo de tipo de seguridad.
SE4-14
SE4-14 PLUS
SE4-20
SF2-30
SE4-30
SE4-30 PLUS
SE4-35
30
35
30
30
35
14
14
20
6
SG4-B-14 14 6
6
6
15
15
15
15
SG2-B-30 30 19
SG2-E-30 30 9 / 19*
TIPO 2 TIPO 4
15
ALCANCE (m)RESOLUCIÓN (mm)
SG4-B-30 30 19
SE2-35
SEVERE(normally irreversible)
LIGHT(normally reversible)
LEVE(normalmente irreversible)
Guía para la selección
GRAVE(normalmente irreversible)
FRECUENCIA Y / O DURACIÓN DEEXPOSICIÓN AL RIESGO
SE4-14 SE4-20SE4-30 SE4-35
SE4-14 PLUS SE4-30 PLUSSG4-B-14 / SG4-B-30
GRAVEDAD DEL DAÑO
54
PROTECCIÓN DE ACCESO
LIGHT(normally reversible)
LEVE(normalmente irreversible)
SEVERE(normally irreversible)
TIPO 2
SE2-PSB-BWS-T2+Sx-ST2
SF2-50 / SF2-90SG2-B-50/90 / SG2-E-50/90
SE4-P SE4-Q SE4-LSE4-R SE4-T SE4-S
SB-BWS-T4 + Sx-ST4
SE2-PSB-BWS-T2+Sx-ST2
SF2-50 / SF2-90SG2-B-50/90 / SG2-E-50/90
ESPORÁDICA / CORTA
RIESGO EVITABLERIESGO EVITABLE
FRECUENTE / LARGA
NOSI
TIPO 4
SI NO
TIPO 2
Atención: La información brindada es indicativa y sintética, es obligatorio para referirse a la completa la norma EN 954 para una correcta y la evaluación del riesgo de tipo de seguridad.
SE2-P 515 - 415 - 315
-
50
TIPO 2 TIPO 4
hasta 50*
ALCANCE (m)RESOLUCIÓN (mm)
SB-BWS-T2 + SX-ST2* 8 m con S5/S10-ST2; 50 m con S30-ST2
* Distancia máxima seleccionable: 9 m o 19 m
SE4-P
SE4-T
SE4-L
SE4-S
SB-BWS-T4 + Sx-ST4
515 - 415
515 - 415
-
515 - 415 - 315
515 - 415 - 315
515 - 415
25
50
3
3
25
up to 50*
SE4-R ‘T’
SE4-R ’L’
SE4-R Linear
515
515
515 3
3
7
7.5
* 8 m con S5/S10-ST4; 40 m con SL5-ST4; 50 m con S30-ST4
* 3 m para las versiones en ’W’; 7 m para las versiones en ‘T’
* 3 m para las versiones en ’W’; 7 m para las versiones en ‘T’
SE4-Q
SG2-E-50 / 90
50 / 90
50 / 90
19
9 / 19*
SG2-B-50 / 90
50 / 90 15SF2-B-50 / 90
GRAVE(normalmente irreversible)
FRECUENCIA Y / O DURACIÓN DEEXPOSICIÓN AL RIESGO
GRAVEDAD DEL DAÑO
7
55
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE SEGURIDAD
56
Atención: La Norma de referencia es la EN 999 ‘Seguridad de máquinas - el posicionamiento deequipos de protección en función de la velocidad de aproximación de las partes del cuerpohumano’.La información brindada es indicativa y sintética; es obligatorio acudir a la norma completa EN 999para calcular correctamente la distancia de seguridad.
La distancia mínima S en mm entre la zona peligrosa y el punto de detección se expresa por mediode la fórmula:
S = (K x T) + C
K es un parámetro (mm/seg) relacionado con la velocidad de aproximación de un cuerpo humano o sus partes T es el tiempo total (seg) necesario para detener la máquina, donde T = t1 + t2t1 = tiempo máx. entre el momento de detección y el cambio de estado del dispositivo de conmutación t2 = tiempo máx. de respuesta de la máquina C es una distancia adicional (mm) basada en la tipología del dispositivo, hablando en términos de resolución, donde la resolución es ladimensión mínima de un objeto opaco capaz de tapar como mínimo uno de los rayos del área sensible de detección.
APROXIMACIÓN NORMAL AL ÁREA DE DETECCIÓNBarreras de protección con resolución máxima de 40 mm
S = (K x T) + C donde K = 2000 mm/seg, C = 8 (d - 14 mm) pero no inferior a 0, d = resolución del dispositivo (mm)
Esta fórmula es válida para distancia de seguridad S hasta 500 mm. Si elresultado fuera S mayor de 500 mm, K = 1600 mm/seg y S = (1600 mm/seg x T) + 8(d-14 mm)
Barreras de protección con resolución incluida entre 40 y 70 mm
S = (K x T) + C donde K = 1600 mm/seg, C = 850 mm
En todos los casos, la altura del rayo más alto será ³ 900 mm y la altura del rayo más bajo será ≤ 300mm.
Barrera multihaz con rayos separados múltiples
S = (K x T) + C donde K = 1600 mm/seg, C = 850 mm
Guía para la selección
objetoopaco
R ≤≤ 40 mm Protección de dedos o manos
R < 116 mm Detección de presencia
R > 70 mm Protección del cuerpo R = resolución
57
Una barrera multihaz desarrollada con 2, 3 o 4 rayos separados se utiliza en muchos casos paradetectar la intrusión de un cuerpo humano o sus partes en un área específica; la cantidad de rayos y ladistancia entre ellos depende de la evaluación de riesgos realizada, y de las aplicaciones específicasde la máquina. Se deberán tener en cuenta posibles riesgos, tal como el pasar por debajo del rayoinferior, pasar por encima del rayo superior o pasar entre los dos rayos. La siguiente tabla informa delas alturas desde el suelo o la base de referencia para los diferentes rayos.
En caso de sólo utilizar un rayo individual en un entorno industrial, se considera apropiada una alturade 750 mm colocando el dispositivo a una distancia de la máquina donde S = (1600 mm/seg x T) + 1200 mm
APROXIMACIÓN PARALELA AL ÁREA DE DETECCIÓN
S = (K x T) + Cdonde K = 1600 mm/seg, C = (1200 mm - 0,4 H), no menor de 850 mmHmáx = 1000 mm, Hmín = 15 (d - 50 mm), donde d = resolución de labarrera de luz
APROXIMACIÓN ANGULAR AL ÁREA DE DETECCIÓN Para ángulos de aproximación previsibles mayores de 30° podemos seguir el procedimiento normalde aproximación, mientras que para ángulos menores de 30° deberemos seguir el procedimiento deaproximación paralela.
Atención: La Norma de referencia es la EN 999 ‘Seguridad de máquinas - el posicionamiento deequipos de protección en función de la velocidad de aproximación de las partes del cuerpohumano’. La información facilitada es indicativa y sintética; es obligatorio acudir a la norma completa EN 999para calcular correctamente la distancia de seguridad.
Número de rayos Altura de rayos individuales desda la base (mm)
4 300, 600, 900, 12003 300, 700, 11002 400, 900
SERIE SE4-14 SE4-14 PLUS
Tipo 4barreras integradas
24 Vcc
14 mm
0.2...6 m
150...1200 mm
21...68 ms14...41 ms Modelos EDM
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polos; Tx: M12 4 polos Rx: M12 5 polos; Tx: M12 5 polos
35 x 40
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec.
EDM selec.
4 modelos disponibles: EDM
Fixed/Floating Blanking EDM Cascada EDM
Cascada/Blanking EDM
Tipo 4barreras integradas
24 Vcc
14 mm
0.2...6 m
150...900 mm
18...39 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polosTx: M12 4 polos
35 x 40
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec. Muting total/parcial selec.
Override
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE SEGURIDAD
58
Protección de los dedos
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS Conforme a
IEC61496-1 IEC61496-2 Alimentación
Resolución
Alcance
Altura controlada
Tiempo de respuesta
Salida OSSD
Conexión
Dimensiones (mm)
Funciones dispositivo
Certificaciones
Funciones plus
SE4-20
Tipo 4barreras integradas
24 Vcc
20 mm
0.2...6 m
150...1650 mm
16...39 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polosTx: M12 4 polos
35 x 40
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec. Muting total/parcial selec.
Override
Tipo 4barreras integradas
24 Vcc
14 mm
0.2...6 m
150 ... 1800 mm
10...51 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polosTx: M12 4 polos
32 x 37
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec.
EDM selec.
SG4-B-14
59
SERIE SE2-35 SF2-30
Tipo 2barreras integradas
24 Vcc
30 mm
0.2...15 m
150...1500 mm
24 ms max.
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 5 polosTx: M12 4 polos
31 x 32
Prueba Reseteo manual
Reseteo automático
Tipo 2barreras integradas
24 Vcc
35 mm
0.2...15 m
150...1650 mm
15...32 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polosTx: M12 4 polos
35 x 40
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec. Muting total/parcial selec.
Override
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE SEGURIDAD
60
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS Conforme a
IEC61496-1 IEC61496-2 Alimentación
Resolución
Alcance
Altura controlada
Tiempo de respuesta
Salida OSSD
Conexión
Dimensiones (mm)
Funciones dispositivo
Certificaciones
Funciones plus
Protección de las manos
SG2-B-30
Tipo 2barreras integradas
24 Vcc
30 mm
0.2...19 m
150...1800 mm
8...24 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 5 polosTx: M12 4 polos
32 x 37
Prueba Reseteo automático
SG2-E-30
Tipo 2barreras integradas
24 Vcc
30 mm
0.2...9 m / 0.2...19 m selec.
150...1800 mm
8...24 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polosTx: M12 4 polos
32 x 37
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec.
EDM selec.Distancia max. seleccionable:
9 m o 19 m
61
Tipo 4barreras integradas
24 Vcc
20 mm
0.2...6 m
150...1650 mm
16...39 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polosTx: M12 4 polos
35 x 40
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec. Muting total/parcial selec.
Override
SE4-20 SE4-30
Tipo 4barreras integradas
24 Vcc
30 mm
0.2...15 m
150...1650 mm
15...32 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polosTx: M12 4 polos
35 x 40
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec. Muting total/parcial selec.
Override
Protección de las manos
SERIE
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE SEGURIDAD
62
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS Conforme a
IEC61496-1 IEC61496-2 Alimentación
Resolución
Alcance
Altura controlada
Tiempo de respuesta
Salida OSSD
Conexión
Dimensiones (mm)
Funciones dispositivo
Certificaciones
Funciones plus
SG4-B-30SE4-30 PLUS SE4-35
Tipo 4barreras integradas
24 Vcc
35 mm
0.2...15 m
150...1650 mm
15...32 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polosTx: M12 4 polos
35 x 40
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec. Muting total/parcial selec.
Override
Tipo 4barreras integradas
24 Vcc
30 mm
0.2...15 m
150...1650 mm
16...43 ms12...26 ms modelli EDM
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polos; Tx: M12 4 polosRx: M12 5 polos; Tx: M12 5 polos
35 x 40
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec.
EDM selec.
4 modelos disponibles: EDM Fixed/Floating Blanking EDM
Cascading EDM Cascading/Blanking EDM
Tipo 4barreras integradas
24 Vcc
30 mm
0.2...19 m
150 ... 1800 mm
9...28 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polosTx: M12 4 polos
32 x 37
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec.
EDM selec.
63
Protección del cuerpo y control de presencia
SERIE SE2-P SB-BWS-T2+Sx-ST2
Tipo 2barreras integradas
24 Vcc
2 - 3 - 4
0.5...50 m
500 - 800 - 900 - 1200 mm
14 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polosTx: M12 4 polos
35 x 40
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec.Muting total/parcial selec.
Override
Tipo 2central y sensores
24 Vcc
hasta 2
hasta 50 m
22 ms max
2 relè
Caja bornes
75 x 100 x 75
Prueba Reseteo manual
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE SEGURIDAD
64
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS Conforme a
IEC61496-1 IEC61496-2 Alimentación
N° rayos / resolución
Alcance
Altura controlada
Tiempo de respuesta
Salida OSSD
Conexión
Dimensiones (mm)
Funciones dispositivo
Certificaciones
Funciones plus
SF2-50 / SF2-90
Tipo 2barreras integradas
24 Vcc
50 / 90 mm
0.2...15 m
300...1500 mm
15...24 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 5 polosTx: M12 4 polos
31 x 32
PruebaReseteo manualReseteo auto.
Tipo 2barreras integradas
24 Vcc
50 / 90 mm
0.2...9 m / 0.2...19 m selec.
300...1800 mm
8...20 ms (vers. 50)8...19 ms (vers. 90)
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polosTx: M12 4 polos
32 x 37
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec.
EDM selec.Distancia max. seleccionable:
9 m o 19 m
SG2-B-50 / SG2-B-90
Tipo 2barreras integradas
24 Vcc
50 / 90 mm
0.2...19 m
300...1800 mm
8...20 ms (vers. 50)8...19 ms (vers. 90)
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 5 polosTx: M12 4 polos
32 x 37
PruebaReseteo auto.
SG2-E-50 / SG2-E-90
65
SERIE SE4-P
Tipo 4barreras integradas
24 Vcc
2 - 3 - 4
4...50 m
500 - 800 - 900 - 1200 mm
14 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polosTx: M12 4 polos
35 x 40
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec.Muting total/parcial selec.
Override
Tipo 4barreras integradas
24 Vcc
2 - 3 - 4
0.5...25 m
500 - 800 - 900 - 1200 mm
14 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polosTx: M12 4 polos
35 x 40
Prueba Reseteo man./auto selec.Muting total/parcial selec.
Override
SE4-Q
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE SEGURIDAD
66
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS Conforme a
IEC61496-1 IEC61496-2 Alimentación
N° rayos
Alcance
Altura controlada
Tiempo de respuesta
Salida OSSD
Conexión
Dimensiones (mm)
Funciones dispositivo
Certificaciones
Funciones plus
Protección del cuerpo
Tipo 4central y sensores
24 Vcc
hasta 4
hasta 50 m
32 ms max
2 relè
bloques terminal
73 x 152 x 118
PruebaReseteo man./auto selec.
Muting total/parcial selec.Muting time-out selec.Doble Muting/Override
SB-BWS-T4+Sx-ST4
67
SERIE SE4-T
Tipo 4barreras integradas con
sensores de Muting 24 Vcc
2 - 3
0.5…3 m (modelos en ‘W’)0.5…7 m (modelos en ‘T’)
500 - 800 mm
14 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polos/M12 5 polosTx: M12 4 polos (modelos en ‘W’)
Tx: M12 4 polos/M12 4 polos (modelos en ‘T’)
35 x 40
Muting bi-direccional Prueba
Reseteo man./auto selec. Muting time-out selec.
EDM selec. Override
SE4-L
Tipo 4barreras integradas con
sensores de Muting 24 Vcc
2 - 3
0.5…3 m (modelos en ‘W’)0.5…7 m (modelos en ‘T’)
500 - 800 mm
14 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polos/M12 5 polosTx: M12 4 polos (modelos en ‘W’)
Tx: M12 4 polos/M12 4 polos (modelos en ‘T’)
35 x 40
Muting uni-direccionalPrueba
Reseteo man./auto selec. Muting time-out selec.
EDM selec. Override
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE SEGURIDAD
68
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS Conforme a
IEC61496-1 IEC61496-2 Alimentación
N° rayos
Alcance
Altura controlada
Tiempo de respuesta
Salida OSSD
Conexión
Dimensiones (mm)
Funciones dispositivo
Certificaciones
Funciones plus
Protección del cuerpocon Muting integrado
SE4-S
Tipo 4barreras integradas
para sensores de Muting externo24 Vcc
2 - 3
0.5…25 m
500 - 800 mm
14 ms
2 transistor PNP
Rx: M12 8 polos/M12 5 polosTx: M12 4 polos (modelos en ‘W’)
Tx: M12 4 polos/M12 4 polos (modelos en ‘T’)
35 x 40
Muting modularPrueba
Reseteo man./auto selec. Muting time-out selec.
EDM selec. Override
69
Protección del cuerpo con unidadpasiva y Muting integrado
SERIES SE4-R-’T’ SE4-R-’L’
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE SEGURIDAD
70
DA
TO
S T
ÉC
NIC
OS Conforme a
IEC61496-1 IEC61496-2 Alimentación
N° rayos
Alcance
Altura controlada
Tiempo de respuesta
Salida OSSD
Conexión
Dimensiones (mm)
Funciones dispositivo
Certificaciones
Funciones plus
Tipo 4unidad pasiva
24 Vcc
2
0.5…3 m
500 mm
14 ms
2 transistor PNP
Unidad activa: M12 5 polos / M12 8 polosUnidad pasiva sin cableado
Unidad activa: 35 x 40Unidad pasiva: 52 x 55
Prueba Selección reset manual/automático
Selección EDMSelección Muting time-out
Override
Tipo 4unidad pasiva
24 Vcc
2
0.5…3 m
500 mm
14 ms
2 transistor PNP
Unidad activa: M12 5 polos / M12 8 polosUnidad pasiva sin cableado
Unidad activa: 35 x 40Unidad pasiva: 52 x 55
Prueba Selección reset manual/automático
Selección EDMSelección Muting time-out
Override
SE4-R LINEAR
71
Tipo 4unidad pasiva
24 Vcc
2
0.5...7.5 m
500 mm
14 ms
2 transistor PNP
Unidad activa: M12 5 polos / M12 8 polosUnidad pasiva sin cableado
Unidad activa: 35 x 40Unidad pasiva: 52 x 55
Prueba Selección reset manual/automático
Selección EDMSelección Muting time-out
Override
Accesorios
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE SEGURIDAD
Los soportes de fijación estánincluidos en las barreras deseguridad modelos SE2, SE4 ySF2. Los soportes de fijaciónestándar (4 pzs. kit) estándisponibles como accesoriospara las barreras de seguridadSE2 y SE4, así como tambiénsoportes de fijación, orientablesy antivibracion. Para lasbarreras de seguridad serieSF2 se encuentran disponiblessoportes de fijaciónstandard (12 pzs. kit)y soportes anti-rayado (4 pzs. kit).
Los soportes de fijación TOP-BOTTOM orientables facilitaránla fase de alineación, inclusobajo las condiciones máscríticas, gracias a un ángulo derotación de 180º y un ángulo deajuste fino de ±10°. El kit desoportes de fijación sesuministra junto con la barrerade luz SG2-E y está disponiblecomo accesorio para la seriecompleta SG2-B y SG4-B.
SERIE CV SERIE ST
Cables deconexión blindados
Soportes defijación
SERIE CS
Cables de conexiónno blindados
El uso de cables blindados esobligatorio para las barreras dela serie SE2 y SE4; en cambioes recomendado para lossensores de seguridad de laserie Sx-ST2/ST4.
- Cables conector M12 de 4, 8 polosaxiales y radiales
- Longitud cable: 3, 5, 10, 15, 25 m - Material cable: PVC
72
Para la conexión de los sensoresMuting están disponibles conectoresM12 no blindados de 4 polos. Parala serie SG2 y SG4-B estándisponibles conectores de cableUL2462 M12 de 4, 5 y 8 polos.
- Conector M12 axial o radial ycable de 3, 4, 5 y 8 polos- Longitud del cable: 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 25 mMaterial del cable: PVC
SERIE TP
Elementos de prueba
SERIE SE - SRT
SERIE LMS
Equipos de MutingSERIE SE - SR2
Relé de seguridad
Lámparas de Muting: estándar,modular, con montaje horizontalo vertical.Sensores de Muting: todos lossensores Datasensor son utiliz-ables para función de Muting.
SERIE CS
73
Caja de conexiones
Caja de conexiones parabarreras de luz con funciónMuting integrada, permite unarápida activación de la funciónOverride accionando losselectores específicos y loscomandos Test /Start pulsandolas teclas correspondientes.Compatible con las barreras deluz SE4T-L y SE4-R.
Caja de conexiones para el EDM
Esta caja de conexiones hasido diseñada con 3 contactosNA y 1 contacto NC para larealimentación de señales conla f inalidad de facil i tar laconexión del EDM de lasbarreras de luz del tipo 2 y 4con función EDM integrada.
- Módulo para las barreas de luzde tipo 2 y tipo 4
- Contactos de salida: 3 contactosde seguridad NA y 1 contacto derealimentación EDM / NC
P iez as de ensayo pa rabarreras de luz de 14, 20,30, 35, 40, 50 y 90 mm dediámetro
Aptos para la serie de barrerasde luz SE2, SF2 y SF4.
- Relé de seguridad tipo 4- Contactos de seguridad :
3 NA y 1 NC
Accesorios
SERIE SE - S SERIE SE - DM
Soportes decolumna y suelo
Espejos dedesviación
SERIE SG - PS / SG - DM
Accesorios utilizados con lasbarreras de seguridad SE2,SE4, SF2 y fotocélulas mono-rayo de seguridad Sx-ST2/ST4. Disponible en diferentes alturasa partir de 150 mm hasta 1800mm. Dimensiones del espejo dedesviación: 124 mm de largo, 6mm de profundidad.
EQUIPOSFOTOELÉCTRICOS DE SEGURIDAD
Accesorios utilizados con lasbarreras de seguridad SE2,SE4, SF2 y el espejo dedesviación SE-DM. Disponibleen diferentes alturas: 800,1000 y 1200 mm con carcasade 30 x 30 mm. 1500 y 1800mm con carcasa de 45 x 45mm. Dimensiones placa defijación de piso: 240 x 240 mm.
74
Columnas de proteccióny espejos de desviación
Columnas de aluminio sólidas parala protección de los espejos y lasbarreras de luz contra golpes.Todas las barreras de luz de lasseries SE y SG pueden sermontadas dentro de estossoportes, al igual que la serie deespejos SG-DM. El sistema defijación suministrado y el nivel deburbuja de aire circular en la basede acero inoxidable garantizan unarápida instalación y una alineaciónprecisa.
Nota: Se deberán seguir exactamentelas instrucciones del manual deinstalación relativas al alcancepara el uso correcto de los espejosde desviación.
SERIE SG - LS SERIE SG - IP69KSERIE SE - LP
Puntero láser
Accesorios utilizados con lasbarreras de seguridad SE2 ySE4, para facilitar el alineadoentre el emisor y receptor.
SERIE SE - P
75
Protección de lentes Protección IP69K
Placa de PMMA para sermontada en la lente frontal dela barrera de luz paraprotegerla contra polvo, virutasy/o gotas de materialincandescente. La protecciónde lentes está disponible parabarreras de luz con una alturacontrolada de 150 a 1800 mm.
Perfil tubular para barreras deluz SG para garantizar laprotección IP67/IP69K, idealpara aplicaciones típicas de laindustria alimentaria donde eluso de detergentes fuertes oagentes agresivos es frecuentey habitual. El accesorio estádisponible para barreras de luzcon una altura controlada de150 mm a 1800 mm.
Columnas de protección
A ser utilizadas con las barrerasde luz SE2, SE4 y SF2.Disponibles en diferentesalturas de 273 a 1743 mm.
76
COMPLEMENTARY PRO-DUCTSREGULADORES DE TEMPERATURA
Serie THEReguladores demicroprocesador 1/8 DIN mP
- Formato estándar 48x96 mm - Versiones con 2 o 3 puntos de control - Acción PID con autoadaptación ADT- Diagnóstico del circuito de regulación -Regulación automática o manual
Los reguladores THE, en elformato estándar de 48x96 mmestán disponibles en versionesindividuales o con dobledisplay, a 12-24 Vca/cc o 80-240 Vca, y con 2 o 3 puntos decontrol, con salida principal derelé o transistor. La acción decontrol principal de tipo PID seregula automáticamente conlos parámetros óptimosmediante el autoajuste inicialAT, o mediante la función deautoadaptación ADT. Lassalidas auxiliares, por otrolado, pueden ser programadascon 16 funciones de alarmadistintas o con un punto fijo deintervención. La función dediagnóstico LFA permitedetectar anomalías en todo elcircuito de regulación, desde elsensor hasta el actuador.También es posible conmutarde la regulación automática(circuito cerrado) a laregulación manual (circuitoabierto), programandodirectamente el valor deporcentaje de la salida.
Serie THQReguladores demicroprocesador 1/16 DIN mP
- Formato estándar 48x48 mm- Parámetros configurables desde el
panel de mandos - Ajustes TC-J/K y RTD Pt100 - Acción PID con autoadaptación ADT- Función de diagnóstico del lazo de
regulación LFA
Los reguladores demicroprocesador de la serieTHQ se distinguen por suelevada precisión de medida yregulación en las operacionesde termosoldadura y deformación térmica, procesostípicos en el embalajeautomático. Con la acción PIDse puede activar el autoajusteinicial AT y la función deautoadaptación permanenteADT, optimizando de estaforma la respuesta avariaciones frecuentes orápidas del sistema, como porejemplo en el caso delarranque o de una interrupcióndel proceso. A través del panelde mandos y el display,individual o doble, seprograman el sensor deajuste, la acción de control ylas funciones de alarma. Lafunción de diagnóstico del lazode regulación LFA permitedetectar la rotura del sensor,de los cables o de los fusiblesde calentamiento.
Serie THTReguladores básicos yavanzados 1/16 DIN
- Formato estándar 48x48 mm - Salida de relé o estática para SSR- Salida analógica 4-20 mA o 0-10 V - Transformador amperimétrico y HBA- Conector de serie RS485 protocolo
MODBUS-RTU
La serie TH-T de reguladoresde temperatura ofrece modelosbásicos aptos para lasaplicaciones más simples ymodelos avanzados diseñadospara sistemas másdesarrollados de control y deinterface. La programación delos reguladores es simple yrápida, con pocas operacionesdesde el panel de mandos. Enlos modelos con interface deserie RS485 también sepueden enviar parámetros deconfiguración y recibir datos deregulación por medio de un PCexterno, siendo posible de estaforma controlar distintosreguladores al mismo tiempo.Las versiones con ajuste desdeun transformadoramperimétrico, disponiblescomo accesorio para medirdesde 25 a 100 A, permitendetectar la interrupción inclusoparcial de la carga, como porejemplo en el caso de rotura deun fusible. Adicionalmente a losmodelos con salidas de controlde relé y de transistor para elcontrol de relés estáticos,existen también modelos consalida analógica proporcionalen corriente de 4-20 mA y detensión de 0-10 V.
EUROPADATALOGIC AUTOMATIONHeadquartersVia S. Vitalino, 1340012 Lippo di Calderara di RenoBologna - ItalyTel. +39 051/3147011Fax +39 051/3147453 [email protected]
DATALOGIC AUTOMATION IBERIASucursal en EspañaC/. Samontá nº 25, 4ª Planta08970 Sant Joan Despí, Barcelona - SpainTel. +34 93/4772059Fax +34 93/[email protected]
DATALOGIC AUTOMATION S.R.L.Italien FilialHöjdrodergatan 21SE-212 39 Malmö - SwedenTel. +46 40/385000Fax +46 40/[email protected]
Datalogic Automation BeneluxColtbaan 25 - 3439 NG NieuwegeinThe NetherlandsTel. +31 30/6023410Fax +31 30/[email protected]
DATALOGIC AUTOMATION S.R.L.Niederlassung Central EuropeUracher Straße 22D-73268 Erkenbrechtsweiler - GermanyTel. +49 7026/6080Fax +49 7026/[email protected]
DATALOGIC AUTOMATION S.R.L.Succursale en FranceLe Parc Technologique de Lyon333 Crs du 3ème Millénaire, 69800 Saint Priest - FranceTel. +33 4/72476180Fax +33 4/[email protected]
DATALOGIC AUTOMATION UKDatalogic HouseDunstable Road - RedbournHertfordshire AL3 7PR - United KingdomTel. +44 1582/464900Fax +44 1582/[email protected]
AMERICADATALOGIC AUTOMATION INC3000 Earhart Court, Suite 135Hebron, Kentucky41048 United StatesTel. +1 859/6897000Fax +1 859/[email protected] Free Phone +1 800/8495358Toll Free Fax +1 800/8495357
ASIADATALOGIC AUTOMATION ASIA LTDSuite 902,Suncome Liauw’s Plaza,738 Shang Cheng Road, Pudong,Shanghai 200120 , ChinaTel: +86 21/58366692/3Fax: +86 )21/[email protected]
DATALOGIC AUTOMATION ASIA LTDUnit 1-3, 7/F, Yuen Long Trading Centre,33 Wang Yip St. West, Yuen Long, NT. - Hong KongTel +852 2785/3912Fax +852 2785/[email protected]
IDEC DATALOGIC.CO.LTD 7-31, Nishi - Miyahara 1 - ChomeYodogawa, Ku Osaka 532004 - JapanTel. +816 6398/3200Fax +816 6398/[email protected]
AUSTRALIA - NUEVA ZELANDADATALOGIC AUTOMATION PTY LTDUnil 130 - 45 Gilby RoadMount Waverley - Victoria3149 AustraliaTel. +61 3/95589299Fax +61 3/[email protected]
www.datasensor.comwww.automation.datalogic.com
Los nombres de productos y empresas y los logotipos mancionados pueden ser marcas registradas o pendientes de registro de sus respectivas empresas. Datalogic se reserva el derecho de modificar cualquier dato o de incluir mejoras sin previo aviso.
UN
IVE
RS
AL
MA
XI S
EN
SO
RS
• Sensitivity adjustment and Stability LED• Free voltage power supply and relay output • 10-30 Vdc power supply with NPN and PNP outputs • Versions with 5 timing functions
The photoelectric sensors of the S2 series are enclosed in sturdy plastic housings,developed to guarantee the complete protection of the control panel andconnection terminals. The free voltage versions present a relay output, while the 10-30 Vdc versionshave a double NPN and PNP output, both available with 1 or 2 m proximity, 5 mpolarised retroreflex, 3 m polarised retroreflex and 10 or 50 m through beam opticfunctions.The red output LED and the green stability LED are visible through the IP66hermetically-sealed cover, that also protects the terminal block and commands,such as the sensitivity adjustment trimmer and dark/light operating mode selector.The versions with output timing present a trimmer to regulate the time up to 16 s.and a selector to set 5 different functions.
S2 SERIES
MULTI-FUNCTION SENSORS
TECHNICAL DATA DETECTION DIAGRAMSPower supply: ............................................... 10 ... 30 Vdc, reverse polarity protection
15 ... 264 Vac/Vdc
Consumption: ............................................... 30 mA max. (d.c. vers.)
3 VA max. (a.c. vers.)
Light emission: ............................................. infrared LED 880 nm
red LED 660 nm (B vers.)
Diffuse proximity operating distance: ........ 1 ... 90 cm (C90 vers.)
1 ... 200 cm (C200 vers.)
Retroreflex operating distance: .................. 0.1 ... 5 m (on R2)
Polarised retroreflex operating distance: .. 0.15 ... 3 m (on R2)
Through beam operating distance: ............ 0 ... 10 m (G10/F10 vers.)
0 ... 50 m (G50/F50 vers.)
Setting: .......................................................... sensitivity trimmer
Indicators: ..................................................... red OUTPUT LED
green STABILITY LED
Output type: .................................................. NPN and PNP, open collector (d.c. vers.)
or relay 1 NO contact (a.c. vers.)
Saturation voltage: ....................................... 1 V max. (NPN vers.)
2 V max. (PNP vers.)
Output current: ............................................. 100 mA max., short-circuit protection
relay 1 A (250 Vac), resistive load
Response time: .............................................1 ms max. (d.c. vers.)
20 ms max. (a.c. vers.)
Switching frequency: ................................... 500 Hz max. (d.c. vers.)
25 Hz max. (a.c. vers.)
Timing function: ........................................... normal, ON-delay, OFF-delay, ON/OFF-
delay, one-shot all adjustable from 0.6
to 16 sec.
Operating mode: ...........................................dark/light selectable
Connection: ...................................................terminal block with 4 screw terminals
gland for cables with 8 to 10 mm diameter
Electrical protection: ................................... class 1 (a.c. vers.)
class 2 (d.c. vers.)
Mechanical protection: ................................ IP66
Housing material: ......................................... PBT plastic
Lens material: ............................................... PMMA plastic
Weight: .......................................................... 100 g max.
Operating temperature: ................................-25 ... +55°C
Storage temperature: ................................... -25 ... +70°C
Reference standard: ..................................... EN 60947-5-2
Certifications: ...............................................
The operating distances indicate the detection distance with excess gain 2.
S2-x-C200-x
S2-x-C90-x
S2-x-B3-x
S2-x-F10/G10
S2-x-F50/G50
White R90%Grey R18%
White R90%
R5R2
Grey R18%
S2-x-A5-x
R5R2
The detection diagrams indicate the typicaloperating distance with excess gain 1.
UNI EN ISO9001 UNI EN ISO14000
CONNECTIONS
DIMENSIONS
S2-5-A/B/C/F S2-5-G
S2-1-A/B/C/F S2-1-G
mm
UN
IVE
RS
AL
MA
XI S
EN
SO
RS
VERSIONS WITH 15 ... 264 Vac/Vdc POWER SUPPLYMODEL FUNCTION OUTPUT CODE N°
S2-1-C90 proximity relay J950530390
S2-1-C90T proximity relay with timer J950535390
S2-1-C200 proximity relay J950530393
S2-1-C200T proximity relay with timer J950535393
S2-1-A5 retroreflex relay J950330390
S2-1-A5T retroreflex relay with timer J950335390
S2-1-B3 polarised retroreflex relay J950320390
S2-1-B3T polarised retroreflex relay with timer J950325390
S2-1-F10 receiver relay J950200390
S2-1-F10T receiver relay with timer J950205390
S2-1-F50 receiver relay J950200394
S2-1-F50T receiver relay with timer J950205394
S2-1-G10 emitter - J950139990
S2-1-G50 emitter - J950139995
VERSIONS WITH 10 ... 30 Vdc POWER SUPPLYMODEL FUNCTION OUTPUT CODE N°
S2-5-C90 proximity NPN/PNP J950530000
S2-5-C90T proximity NPN/PNP with timer J950535000
S2-5-C200 proximity NPN/PNP J950530003
S2-5-C200T proximity NPN/PNP with timer J950535003
S2-5-A5 retroreflex NPN/PNP J950330000
S2-5-A5T retroreflex NPN/PNP with timer J950335000
S2-5-B3 polarised retroreflex NPN/PNP J950320000
S2-5-B3T polarised retroreflex NPN/PNP with timer J950325000
S2-5-F10 receiver NPN/PNP J950200000
S2-5-F10T receiver NPN/PNP with timer J950205000
S2-5-F50 receiver NPN/PNP J950200004
S2-5-F50T receiver NPN/PNP with timer J950205004
S2-5-G10 emitter - J950139900
S2-5-G50 emitter - J950139905
MODEL SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
Distributed by:
Pri
nte
d in
Ital
y in
Ju
ly 2
005
Rev
. 02
HEADQUARTERS
DATASENSOR SpAvia Lavino, 265 - 40050 Monte San Pietro, BO - ItalyTel. +39 051/6765611 • Fax +39 051/6759324 www.datasensor.com • e-mail [email protected]
Datasensor SpA endeavours to continuously improve and renew its products; for this reason thetechnical data and contents of this catalogue may undergo variations without prior notice. For correctinstallation and use Datasensor SpA can guarantee only the data indicated in the instruction manualsupplied with the products.
UN
IVE
RS
AL
TU
BU
LA
R S
EN
SO
RS
• Complete range of optic functions, universal, applicationand laser class 1
• Flat plastic tubular housing for improved versatility ormetal cylindrical housing
• Versions with axial or radial optics, with fixed, trimmer orEASYtouch™ teach-in adjustment
• Cable or M12 connection with EN standard NPN or PNPNO-NC configuration
The S50 series offers all optical functions within a M18 housing. With the universal sensing functions of proximity, polarised retroreflex and throughbeam, which are also available with class 1 laser emission, as well as the moreadvanced functions of background suppression, background/foregroundsuppression, analogue displacement, contrast and luminescence, the S50 really isone housing for all applications.The S50 setting is carried out-by either by potentiometer, which is sealed to IP67,or using the patented EASYtouch™ push-button teach system, which gives rapidand precise automatic setting of the switching points.The S50 series is available both in flat plastic format ideal for M18 nut or screwmounting through the sensor body, as well as a cylindrical metal housing. Axial orradial optics are available in both housings with integral cable or M12 connectionconforming to EN 60947-5-2, the European wiring standard. The performance,versatility and extensive optical sensing options, positions the S50 series as thenew bench mark for customers focused on the evolution of technology anddevelopment of standards.
S50 SERIES
M18 MULTIFUNCTION OPTOELECTRONICSENSORS
one for all
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andstability LEDs (receiver);power on LED (emitter)
Adjustment tr immer(receiver)
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
B
B
F
F
D
C C
CC
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
THROUGH BEAM WITH INFRARED EMISSION
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
EMITTER
RECEIVER
B
EMITTER
S50-PA/PR-5S50-PA/PR-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
RECEIVER
RADIAL OPTICS
2
A
Longer operating distances can beobtained utilising separate emitterand receiver units. The infraredemission is modulated to avoidinterference with other lightsources and the emitter is fittedwith test inputs for remote systeminterrogation.
G/F
mm
receiver - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-PA-2-F01-NN 952001660 NPNS50-PA-2-F01-PP 952001150 PNP
emitter - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-PA-2-G00-XG 952001190
receiver - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-F01-NN 952001820 NPNS50-PR-2-F01-PP 952001170 PNP
emitter - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-G00-XG 952001210
receiver - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-F01-NN 952001550 NPNS50-PA-5-F01-PP 952001160 PNP
emitter - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-G00-XG 952001200
receiver - radial optics - M12 connector S50-PR-5-F01-NN 952001760 NPNS50-PR-5-F01-PP 952001180 PNP
emitter - radial optics - M12 connector S50-PR-5-G00-XG 952001220
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 Emitter off with Test+ on Vdc and Test- on 0 V5 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 30 mradial optics 0 ... 25 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption:
emitter ≤ 35 mAreceiver ≤ 30 mA
Light emission: infrared LED 880 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx. 500 mm at 15 mradial optics approx. 470 mm at 10 m
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED green POWER ON LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 2 ms Switching frequency: 250 Hz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCAuxiliary functions: Test + and Test -Connection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material: PBTLens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
S50
-PA
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-PA
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-PR
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-PA
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-F
01-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-G
00-X
G
S50
-PR
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-5-F
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-5-G
00-X
G
6 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
7 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
receiver outputs
3
SELECTION TABLE
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
S50-PA/PR 30 m
II3D
0 15 30 (m)
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
axial
radial 20
30
25
Detection areaExcess gain
axial
axial
radial
radial
25
Longer operating distances can beobtained utilising separate emitterand receiver units. The infraredemission is modulated to avoidinterference with other lightsources and the emitter is fittedwith test inputs for remote systeminterrogation.
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
D E
THROUGH BEAM WITH INFRARED EMISSION
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
EMITTER
RECEIVER
S50-MA/MR-5S50-MA/MR-2
B B
RADIAL OPTICS
4
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs (receiver);power on LED (emitter)
Adjustment tr immer(receiver)
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
A
B
C
D
E
CONNECTIONS
C C
CC
B
A
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
EMITTER
RECEIVER
G/F
mm
5
TECHNICAL DATA
TECHNICAL NOTES
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 30 mradial optics 0 ... 25 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption:
emitter ≤ 35 mAreceiver ≤ 30 mA
Light emission: infrared LED 880 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx. 500 mm at 15 mradial optics approx. 470 mm at 10 m
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED green POWER ON LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 2 ms Switching frequency: 250 Hz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCAuxiliary functions: Test + and Test -Connection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material: nickel plated brassLens material: PMMAWeight:
110 g max. 60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
S50
-MA
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-MR
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-MA
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-F
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-G
00-X
G
S50
-MR
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-5-F
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-5-G
00-X
G
1
3
4
5
7
6
2
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 Emitter off with Test+ on Vdc and Test- on 0 V5 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
6 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
7 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
receiver outputs
SELECTION TABLE
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
receiver - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-F01-NN 952021700 NPNS50-MA-2-F01-PP 952021250 PNP
emitter - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-G00-XG 952021060
receiver - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MR-2-F01-NN 952021640 NPNS50-MR-2-F01-PP 952021170 PNP
emitter - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MR-2-G00-XG 952021180
receiver - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-F01-NN 952021700 NPNS50-MA-5-F01-PP 952021250 PNP
emitter - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-G00-XG 952021260
receiver - radial optics - M12 connector S50-MR-5-F01-NN 952021800 NPNS50-MR-5-F01-PP 952021370 PNP
emitter - radial optics - M12 connector S50-MR-5-G00-XG 952021380
S50-MA/MR 30 m
II3D
0 15 30 (m)
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
axial
radial 20
30
25
Detection areaExcess gain
axial
axial
radial
radial
25
NOT USED
TEST +
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andpower on LEDs
Adjustment tr immer(receiver)
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
B
B
F
F
D
C C
CC
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.Decrease sensitivity to increase resolution.
EMITTER
RECEIVER
B
EMITTER
S50-PL/PH-5S50-PL/PH-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
RECEIVER
RADIAL OPTICS
6
A
The high operating distance typicalof emitter and receiver pairs isnotably increased thanks to theuse of visible red laser emission.The laser beam can be easilyaligned and offers excellentdetection resolution of even smallobjects. The class 1 laser emissionguarantees maximum safety for theoperators in all applications.
LASER THROUGH BEAM WITH RED EMISSIONL-G/F
mm
7
S50-PL/PH 60 m
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 60 mradial optics 0 ... 50 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption:
emitter ≤ 35 mAreceiver ≤ 30 mA
Light emission:red Laser 650 nmclass 1 EN 60825-1class II CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
Resolution:approx. 2.5 mm at 5 mapprox. 5 mm at 10 mapprox. 10 mm over 20 m
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green POWER ON LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 333 µs Switching frequency: 1.5 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCAuxiliary functions: Test +Connection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material: PBTLens material: PMMA / glassWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max.
Operating temperature: -10 ... +50°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2,
EN 60825-1, CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
S50
-PL
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-PL
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-PL
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-PL
-5-G
00-X
G
S50
-PL
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-PL
-5-F
01-P
P
S50
-PH
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-PH
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-PH
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-PH
-5-G
00-X
G
S50
-PH
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-PH
-5-F
01-P
P
TECHNICAL NOTES1 Limit values2 Average life of 50.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 Emitter off with Test+ connected to +Vcc
Emitter on with Test+ not connected or connected to 0V
5 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
SELECTION TABLEemitter - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PL-2-G00-XG 952001420
receiver - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PL-2-F01-NN 952001890 NPNS50-PL-2-F01-PP 952001400 PNP
emitter - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PH-2-G00-XG 952002060
receiver - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PH-2-F01-NN 952002030 NPNS50-PH-2-F01-PP 952002020 PNP
emitter - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PL-5-G00-XG 952001430
receiver - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PL-5-F01-NN 952001860 NPNS50-PL-5-F01-PP 952001410 PNP
emitter - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PH-5-G00-XG 952002070
receiver - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PH-5-F01-NN 952002050 NPNS50-PH-5-F01-PP 952002040 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
6 Compatible with quick connection systems 7 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on receiver outputs
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
0 15 30 45 60 (m)
Operating distance
60
50
Resolution - axialDetection area - axial
Detection area - radial Resolution - radial
radial
axial
The use of the MICRO-18 fixing bracket(cod. 95ACC1380) is recommended for thecorrect optic axis alignment of the laseremission.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andpower on LEDs
Adjustment tr immer(receiver)
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
B
The high operating distance typicalof emitter and receiver pairs isnotably increased thanks to the useof visible red laser emission. Thelaser beam can be easily alignedand offers excellent detectionresolution of even small objects.The class 1 laser emissionguarantees maximum safety for theoperators in all applications.
S50-ML/MH-5S50-ML/MH-2EMITTER
8
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distanceDecrease sensitivity to increase resolution.
A
NOT USED
TEST +
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
RECEIVER
LASER THROUGH BEAM WITH RED EMISSIONL-G/F
RADIAL OPTICS
D E
EMITTER
RECEIVER
B B
C C
CC
mm
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 60 mradial optics 0 ... 50 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption:
emitter ≤ 35 mAreceiver ≤ 30 mA
Light emission:red Laser 650 nmclass 1 EN 60825-1class II CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
Resolution: approx. 2.5 mm at 5 mapprox. 5 mm at 10 mapprox. 10 mm over 20 m
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green POWER ON LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 333 µs Switching frequency: 1.5 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCAuxiliary functions: Test +Connection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material: nickel plated brassLens material: PMMA / glassWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max.
Operating temperature: -10 ... +50°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2,
EN 60825-1, CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
TECHNICAL NOTES1 Limit values2 Average life of 50.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 Emitter off with Test+ connected to +Vcc
Emitter on with Test+ not connected or connected to 0V
6 Compatible with quick connection systems 7 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on receiver outputs
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
0 15 30 45 60 (m)
Operating distance
60
50
Resolution - axialDetection area - axial
Detection area - radial Resolution - radial
radial
axial
9
S50-ML/MH 60 m
TECHNICAL DATA
S50
-ML
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-ML
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-ML
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-ML
-5-G
00-X
G
S50
-ML
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-ML
-5-F
01-P
P
S50
-MH
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-MH
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-MH
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-MH
-5-G
00-X
G
S50
-MH
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-MH
-5-F
01-P
P
SELECTION TABLEemitter - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-ML-2-G00-XG 952021430
receiver - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-ML-2-F01-NN 952021840 NPNS50-ML-2-F01-PP 952021420 PNP
emitter - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MH-2-G00-XG 952022060
receiver - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MH-2-F01-NN 952022030 NPNS50-MH-2-F01-PP 952022020 PNP
emitter - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-ML-5-G00-XG 952021470
receiver - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-ML-5-F01-NN 952021870 NPNS50-ML-5-F01-PP 952021460 PNP
emitter - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MH-5-G00-XG 952022070
receiver - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MH-5-F01-NN 952022050 NPNS50-MH-5-F01-PP 952022040 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
The use of the MICRO-18 fixing bracket(cod. 95ACC1380) is recommended for thecorrect optic axis alignment of the laseremission.
5 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
RETROREFLEX WITH INFRARED EMISSION
With retroreflex sensors the objectis detected when it interrupts thelight beam generated between thesensor and its associatedprismatic reflector. This retroreflexsystem, created between thesensor and the reflector, offers theadvantage of electricallyconnecting one single unit insteadof two, as in the emitter-receiversystem.
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status LED
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
D E
F
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
C
10
C
A
A
A
mm
5 (m)
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
11
S50-PA 5 mS50-MA
TECHNICAL NOTES1 Limit values2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems 5 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on the outputs
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 0.1 ... 5 m Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: infrared LED 880 nmSpot dimension: approx. 100 mm at 2 mIndicators: yellow OUTPUT LED Output type:
PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max. 60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
5
2
S50
-PA
-2-A
00-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-A
00-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-A
00-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-A
00-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-A
00-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-A
00-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-A
00-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-A
00-P
P
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-A00-NN 952002090 NPNS50-PA-2-A00-PP 952002080 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-A00-NN 952022090 NPNS50-MA-2-A00-PP 952022080 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-A00-NN 952002110 NPNS50-PA-5-A00-PP 952002100 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-A00-NN 952022110 NPNS50-MA-5-A00-PP 952022100 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
Detection areaExcess gain
R2R5
R2 R5
10.1 2 3 4
Operating distance
axial on R5 5
axial on R2 4
POLARISED RETROREFLEX WITH RED EMISSION
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Reflectors (A.01), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
B
B
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
RADIAL OPTICS
12
D E
F B F
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
BC
C C
CB
B
A
A
With retroreflex sensors the objectis detected when it interrupts thelight beam generated between thesensor and its associatedprismatic reflector. High-polarisation optic filters also allowreliable detection of very reflectiveobjects, such as mirrored surfacesthat, differently from the prismaticreflector, reflect the light beamwithout rotating the polarisationplane.
B
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES1 Limit values2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
5 Compatible with quick connection systems 6 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on the outputs
10.1 2 3 4 5 (m)
axial on R2 3.5
4.5
4
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0.1 ... 4.5 m radial optics 0.1 ... 3 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: red LED 660 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx. 45 mm at 1 mradial optics approx. 60 mm at 2 m
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max. 60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
5
6
2
S50
-PA
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-B
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-5-B
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-B
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-5-B
01-P
P
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-PA-2-B01-NN 952001610 NPNS50-PA-2-B01-PP 952001010 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-B01-NN 952021500 NPNS50-MA-2-B01-PP 952021000 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-B01-NN 952001500 NPNS50-PA-5-B01-PP 952001020 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-B01-NN 952021660 NPNS50-MA-5-B01-PP 952021200 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-B01-NN 952001780 NPNS50-PR-2-B01-PP 952001030 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MR-2-B01-NN 952021600 NPNS50-MR-2-B01-PP 952021140 PNP
plastic - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PR-5-B01-NN 952001720 NPNS50-PR-5-B01-PP 952001040 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MR-5-B01-NN 952021760 NPNS50-MR-5-B01-PP 952021340 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
radial on R5
radial on R2
2.5
2
3
2.5
axial on R5 4
Detection area - axialExcess gain - axial
Excess gain - radial Detection area - radial
13
R2
R2
High efficiency reflectors can be usedto obtain larger operating distances.Refer to Reflectors (A.01) of theGeneral Catalogue.
R5
R2
R5
R5
R5 R2
3 mS50-PA/PR S50-MA/MR 4.5 m
D E
F B F
BC
C C
CB
B
LASER RETROREFLEX WITH RED EMISSION
The visible red laser emissionincreases the operating distanceand resolution of the polarisedretroreflex sensor. Specific R7 orR8 reflectors with 0.8 mm micro-prisms are available for high-resolution detection of smallobjects. The class 1 laser emissionguarantees maximum safety for theoperators in all applications.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Reflectors (A.01), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
PLASTIC HOUSING
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
B
B
14
METAL HOUSING
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distanceDecrease sensitivity to increase resolution.
A
A
L-B
RADIAL OPTICS
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES1 Limit values2 Average life of 50.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PL-2-B01-NN 952001870 NPNS50-PL-2-B01-PP 952001360 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PH-2-B01-NN 952001950 NPNS50-PH-2-B01-PP 952001940 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-ML-2-B01-NN 952021820 NPNS50-ML-2-B01-PP 952021400 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MH-2-B01-NN 952021950 NPNS50-MH-2-B01-PP 952021940 PNP
plastic -axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PL-5-B01-NN 952001840 NPNS50-PL-5-B01-PP 952001370 PNP
plastic -radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PH-5-B01-NN 952001970 NPNS50-PH-5-B01-PP 952001960 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-ML-5-B01-NN 952021850 NPNS50-ML-5-B01-PP 952021440 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MH-5-B01-NN 952021970 NPNS50-MH-5-B01-PP 952021960 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0.1 ... 16 mradial optics 0.1 ... 9 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission:
red Laser 650 nmclass 1 EN 60825-1class II CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
Resolution:2 mm max. at 3 m (on R7)5 mm max. over 7 m (on R2)
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 333 µs Switching frequency: 1.5 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMA / glassWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -10 ... +50°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2,
EN 60825-1, CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
1
3
4
6
5
2
S50
-PL
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-PL
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-PH
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-PH
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-PL
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-PL
-5-B
01-P
P
S50
-PH
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-PH
-5-B
01-P
P
S50
-ML
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-ML
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-MH
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-MH
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-ML
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-ML
-5-B
01-P
P
S50
-MH
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-MH
-5-B
01-P
P
5 Compatible with quick connection systems 6 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on the outputs
15
High efficiency reflectors can be usedto obtain larger operating distances.Refer to Reflectors (A.01) of theGeneral Catalogue.
S50-PH/PL S50-MH/ML 16 m
8 12 16 (m)
axial on R7 11
Operating distance
radial on R2
radial on R7
9
axial on R2 16
Resolution on R7 reflector - axialDetection area - axial
Detection area - radial Resolution on R7 reflector - radial
R7R2
R7 R2
The use of the MICRO-18 fixing bracket(cod. 95ACC1380) is recommended for thecorrect optic axis alignment of the laseremission.
6
RETROREFLEX FOR TRANSPARENTS WITH RED EMISSION
With high sensitivity and reducedhysteresis this retroreflex sensorallows the detection of even asmall variation of the lightemission received by the sensor,typically created by the presenceof transparent objects such asglass or PET containers or plasticfilm sheets for packaging. Thepresence of polarising filtersavoids false switching on shinysurfaces.
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Reflectors (A.01), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status LED
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
D E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
B
B
B
B
BB
F
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
C
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
16
C C
C
A
A
RADIAL OPTICS
T
mm
1 Limit values2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-T01-NN 952001690 NPNS50-PA-2-T01-PP 952001260 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-T01-NN 952021570 NPNS50-MA-2-T01-PP 952021090 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-T01-NN 952001580 NPNS50-PA-5-T01-PP 952001270 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-MA-5-T01-NN 952021730 NPNS50-MA-5-T01-PP 952021290 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-T01-NN 952001830 NPNS50-PR-2-T01-PP 952001280 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MR-2-T01-NN 952021650 NPNS50-MR-2-T01-PP 952021190 PNP
plastic - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PR-5-T01-NN 952001770 NPNS50-PR-5-T01-PP 952001290 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MR-5-T01-NN 952021810 NPNS50-MR-5-T01-PP 952021390 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0.1 ... 1.7 mradial optics 0.1 ... 1.7 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: red LED 660 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx. 45 mm at 1 mradial optics approx. 60 mm at 1 m
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators: yellow OUTPUT LED Output type:
PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
5
6
2
S50
-PA
-2-T
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-T
01-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-T
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-T
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-2-T
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-2-T
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-5-T
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-5-T
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-T
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-T
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-T
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-T
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-2-T
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-2-T
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-5-T
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-5-T
01-P
P
5 Compatible with quick connection systems 6 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on the outputs
0.50.1 1 1.5 2 (m)
axial on R2 1
1.7
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
radial on R5
radial on R2 1
axial on R5
1.4
TECHNICAL NOTES
17
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
Detection areaExcess gain
1.4 1.7
1.3
1.3
R2
R5 R2R5
S50-PA/PR 1.7 mS50-MA/MR
High efficiency reflectors can be usedto obtain larger operating distances.Refer to Reflectors (A.01) of theGeneral Catalogue
SHORT DIFFUSE PROXIMITY WITH INFRARED EMISSION
This diffuse proximity sensorrepresents a reliable, simple andcost-effective solution for thedirect detection of any objectinside the fixed operating distance.Its particularly compactdimensions permit the installationin very small spaces.
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status LED
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
D E
FF
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
C
C
C
18
C
A
A
RADIAL OPTICS
C
mm
Detection area - axialExcess gain - axial
Excess gain - radial
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-PA-2-C10-NN 952001630 NPNS50-PA-2-C10-PP 952001240 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-MA-2-C10-NN 952021520 NPNS50-MA-2-C10-PP 952021020 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PA-5-C10-NN 952001520 NPNS50-PA-5-C10-PP 952001250 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-MA-5-C10-NN 952021680 NPNS50-MA-5-C10-PP 952021220 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-C10-NN 952001800 NPNS50-PR-2-C10-PP 952001490 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MR-2-C10-NN 952021620 NPNS50-MR-2-C10-PP 952021490 PNP
plastic - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PR-5-C10-NN 952001740 NPNS50-PR-5-C10-PP 952001480 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MR-5-C10-NN 952021780 NPNS50-MR-5-C10-PP 952021480 PNP
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 10 cmradial optics 0 ... 8 cm
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: infrared LED 880 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx. 80 mm at 10 cmradial optics approx. 55 mm at 10 cm
Indicators: yellow OUTPUT LED Output type:
PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
5
4
2
S50
-PA
-2-C
10-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-C
10-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-C
10-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-C
10-P
P
S50
-PR
-2-C
10-N
N
S50
-PR
-2-C
10-P
P
S50
-PR
-5-C
10-N
N
S50
-PR
-5-C
10-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-C
10-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-C
10-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-C
10-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-C
10-P
P
S50
-MR
-2-C
10-N
N
S50
-MR
-2-C
10-P
P
S50
-MR
-5-C
10-N
N
S50
-MR
-5-C
10-P
P
0 2.5 5 7.5 10 12.5 (cm)
axial
radial
10
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
TECHNICAL NOTES
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
8
19
White 90%
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
Detection area - radial
White 90%
S50-PA/PR 10 cmS50-MA/MR
mm
cm
mm
cm
cm
cm
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
11
9
DIFFUSE PROXIMITY WITH INFRARED EMISSION
This version of diffuse proximitysensor has a detection distancethat can be set using thesensitivity adjustment trimmer. Thegreen stability LED indicateswhether the received signal isabove to the minimum signal forstable output switching.
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
B
B
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
20
D E
F B
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
BC
C
A
A
C
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 0 ... 40 cmPower supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: infrared LED 880 nmSpot dimension: approx. 100 mm at 300 cmSetting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: light on NO / dark on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
6
5
2
S50
-PA
-2-C
21-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-C
21-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-C
21-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-C
21-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-C
21-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-C
21-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-C
21-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-C
21-P
P
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-C21-NN 952002170 NPNS50-PA-2-C21-PP 952002160 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-C21-NN 952022130 NPNS50-MA-2-C21-PP 952022120 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-C21-NN 952002190 NPNS50-PA-5-C21-PP 952002180 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-C21-NN 952022150 NPNS50-MA-5-C21-PP 952022140 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
5 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
6 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
TECHNICAL NOTES
21
Recommended operating distanceMaximum operating distance
S50-PA 40 cmS50-MA
0 10 20 30 40 (cm)
40
Detection areaExcess gain
35
White 90%Grey 18% White 90%
Grey 18%
LONG DIFFUSE PROXIMITY WITH INFRARED EMISSION
This version of diffuse proximitysensor offers the maximumoperating distance for the directdetection of objects. The detectiondistance can be set using thesensitivity adjustment trimmer. Thegreen stability LED indicateswhether the received signal isabove to the minimum signal forstable output switching.
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
B
B
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
22
D E
F B F
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
BC C
CC
B
B
A
A
RADIAL OPTICS
C
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 70 cmradial optics 0 ... 40 cm
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: infrared LED 880 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx.200 mm at 60 cmradial optics approx.35 mm at 40 cm
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
6
5
2
S50
-PA
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-C
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-5-C
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-C
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-5-C
01-P
P
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-C01-NN 952001620 NPNS50-PA-2-C01-PP 952001050 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-C01-NN 952021510 NPNS50-MA-2-C01-PP 952021010 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-C01-NN 952001510 NPNS50-PA-5-C01-PP 952001060 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-C01-NN 952021670 NPNS50-MA-5-C01-PP 952021210 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-C01-NN 952001790 NPNS50-PR-2-C01-PP 952001070 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MR-2-C01-NN 952021610 NPNS50-MR-2-C01-PP 952021150 PNP
plastic - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PR-5-C01-NN 952001730 NPNS50-PR-5-C01-PP 952001080 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MR-5-C01-NN 952021770 NPNS50-MR-5-C01-PP 952021350 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
5 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
6 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
TECHNICAL NOTES
0 15 30 45 60 (cm)
axial
radial 35
60 70
40
23
Detection area - axialExcess gain - axial
Excess gain - radial
Grey 18%
White 90%
White 90%
White 90%
Grey 18%
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
Detection area - radial
Recommended operating distanceMaximum operating distance
S50-PA/PR 70 cmS50-MA/MR
mm
cm
mm
cm
cm
cm
FIXED FOCUS PROXIMITY WITH RED EMISSION
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
The fixed focus proximity sensoroffers a simple fixed backgroundsuppression distance beyondwhich no object is detected. Thefixed triangulation of the opticsgreatly reduces the detectiondistance of reflective objects. Thevisible red emission facilitatessensor installation.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status LED
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
24
D E
FF
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
CC
C C
A
A
RADIAL OPTICS
D
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-D00-NN 952001640 NPNS50-PA-2-D00-PP 952001090 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-D00-NN 952021530 NPNS50-MA-2-D00-PP 952021030 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-D00-NN 952001530 NPNS50-PA-5-D00-PP 952001100 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-D00-NN 952021690 NPNS50-MA-5-D00-PP 952021230 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-D00-NN 952001810 NPNS50-PR-2-D00-PP 952001110 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cableS50-MR-2-D00-NN 952021630 NPNS50-MR-2-D00-PP 952021160 PNP
plastic - radial optics - M12 connector S50-PR-5-D00-NN 952001750 NPNS50-PR-5-D00-PP 952001120 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connector S50-MR-5-D00-NN 952021790 NPNS50-MR-5-D00-PP 952021360 PNP
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0.5 ... 10 cmradial optics 0 ... 8 cm
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: red LED 630 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx. 20 mm at 10 cmradial optics approx. 25 mm at 8 cm
Indicators: yellow OUTPUT LED Output type:
PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
5
4
2
S50
-PA
-2-D
00-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-D
00-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-D
00-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-D
00-P
P
S50
-PR
-2-D
00-N
N
S50
-PR
-2-D
00-P
P
S50
-PR
-5-D
00-N
N
S50
-PR
-5-D
00-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-D
00-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-D
00-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-D
00-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-D
00-P
P
S50
-MR
-2-D
00-N
N
S50
-MR
-2-D
00-P
P
S50
-MR
-5-D
00-N
N
S50
-MR
-5-D
00-P
P
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
0 2.5 5 7.5 10 (cm)
Operating distance
axial
radial
10
8
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
TECHNICAL NOTES
Detection area - axialExcess gain - axial
Excess gain - radial
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
White 90%White 90%
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
Detection - radial
S50-PA/PR 10 cmS50-MA/MR
mm
cm
mm
cm
cm
cm
25
D E
B F
BC C
CC
B
B
LASER PROXIMITY WITH RED EMISSION
The visible red laser emissionallows the accurate detection ofvery small objects. The sensorsoperate as a proximity device up to35 cm and can be used as acontrast sensor for high contrastmark detection. The class 1 laseremission guarantees maximumsafety for the operators in allapplications.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
BB
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
B
26
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
A
A
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
L-C
RADIAL OPTICS
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES1 Limit values2 Average life of 50.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PL-2-C01-NN 952001880 NPNS50-PL-2-C01-PP 952001380 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PH-2-C01-NN 952001990 NPNS50-PH-2-C01-PP 952001980 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-ML-2-C01-NN 952021830 NPNS50-ML-2-C01-PP 952021410 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MH-2-C01-NN 952021990 NPNS50-MH-2-C01-PP 952021980 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PL-5-C01-NN 952001850 NPNS50-PL-5-C01-PP 952001390 PNP
plastic - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PH-5-C01-NN 952002010 NPNS50-PH-5-C01-PP 952002000 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-ML-5-C01-NN 952021860 NPNS50-ML-5-C01-PP 952021450 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MH-5-C01-NN 952022010 NPNS50-MH-5-C01-PP 952022000 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 35 cmradial optics 0 ... 25 cm
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission:
red Laser 650 nmclass 1 EN 60825-1class II CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
Resolution: approx. 0.3 mm at 5 cmapprox. 0.3 mm at 10 cmapprox. 0.5 mm at 20 cmapprox. 2 mm at 30 cm
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 333 µs Switching frequency: 1.5 kHz Operating mode: light on NO / dark on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMA / glassWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -10 ... +50°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2,
EN 60825-1, CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
1
3
4
6
5
2
S50
-PL
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-PL
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-PH
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-PH
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-PL
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-PL
-5-C
01-P
P
S50
-PH
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-PH
-5-C
01-P
P
S50
-ML
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-ML
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-MH
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-MH
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-ML
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-ML
-5-C
01-P
P
S50
-MH
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-MH
-5-C
01-P
P
5 Compatible with quick connection systems 6 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on the outputs
0 10 20 40 (cm)
Operating distance
25
35
S50-PH/PL S50-MH/ML 35 cm
27
Resolution - axialDetection area - axial
Detection area - radial Resolution - radial
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
White 90%
radial
axial
The use of the MICRO-18 fixing bracket(cod. 95ACC1380) is recommended for thecorrect optic axis alignment of the laseremission.
AXIAL BACKGROUND SUPPRESSION WITH RED EMISSION
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andREADY / ERROR LEDs
Teach-in push-button
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Teach-in button for setting.EASYtouch™ provides two setting modes: standard or fine,both obtained by pressing the push-button only once. Pleaserefer to instructions manual for operating details.
AB
B
CONNECTIONS
Background suppression proximityallows to precisely adjust thedistance over which the object isnot detected, with the minimumdifference between reflectiveobjects. The EASYtouchTM settingprocedure fixes automatically thebest detection conditions, simplypressing once the teach-in push-button, in presence of thereference to detect.
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
C
C
D E
F
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
B
B
28
A
M
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 5 ... 10 cmPower supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 30 mALight emission: red LED 630 nmSpot dimension: approx. 8 mm at 10 cmSetting: teach-in push-button Setting procedure: teach-in EASYtouchTM
Indicators:yellow OUTPUT LED green / red READY / ERROR LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 1 ms Switching frequency: 500 Hz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
5
4
2
S50
-PA
-2-M
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-M
03-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-M
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-M
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-M
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-M
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-M
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-M
03-P
P
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-M03-NN 952001670 NPNS50-PA-2-M03-PP 952001230 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-M03-NN 952021550 NPNS50-MA-2-M03-PP 952021070 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-M03-NN 952001560 NPNS50-PA-5-M03-PP 952001000 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-M03-NN 952021710 NPNS50-MA-5-M03-PP 952021270 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
0 2 4 6 8
Operating distance
10
10 (cm)
Detection difference withfine acquisition
Detection difference with EASYtouch™ acquisition
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
White 90%
% d
iffere
nce
obje
ct d
ista
nce
Setting distance on white 90% background Setting distance on white 90% background
% d
iffere
nce
obje
ct d
ista
nce
S50-PA S50-MA 10 cm
29
RADIAL BACKGROUND SUPPRESSION WITH RED EMISSION
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Teach-in button for setting.EASYtouch™ provides two setting modes: standard or fine,both obtained by pressing the push-button only once. Pleaserefer to instructions manual for operating details.
D
B
CF
B
C
E
CONNECTIONS
Background suppression proximityallows to precisely adjust thedistance over which the object isnot detected, with the minimumdifference between reflectiveobjects. The EASYtouchTM settingprocedure fixes automatically thebest detection conditions, simplypressing once the teach-in push-button, in presence of the referenceto detect.
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
30
OUTPUT status andREADY / ERROR LEDs
Teach-in push-button
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
AB
BA
M
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 5 ... 10 cmPower supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 30 mALight emission: red LED 630 nmSpot dimension: approx. 10 mm at 10 cmSetting: teach-in push-button Setting procedure: teach-in EASYtouchTM
Indicators:yellow OUTPUT LED green / red READY / ERROR LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 1 ms Switching frequency: 500 Hz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBT / PVCnickel plated brass
Lens material: glassWeight:
90 g max. 40 g max. 125 g max.75 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
5
2
S50
-PS
-2-M
03-N
N
S50
-PS
-2-M
03-P
P
S50
-PS
-5-M
03-N
N
S50
-PS
-5-M
03-P
P
S50
-MS
-2-M
03-N
N
S50
-MS
-2-M
03-P
P
S50
-MS
-5-M
03-N
N
S50
-MS
-5-M
03-P
P
SELECTION TABLEplastic - 2 m cable S50-PS-2-M03-NN 952001900 NPNS50-PS-2-M03-PP 952001910 PNP
metal - 2 m cable S50-MS-2-M03-NN 952021900 NPNS50-MS-2-M03-PP 952021910 PNP
plastic - M12 connectorS50-PS-5-M03-NN 952001920 NPNS50-PS-5-M03-PP 952001930 PNP
metal - M12 connectorS50-MS-5-M03-NN 952021920 NPNS50-MS-5-M03-PP 952021930 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
0 2 4 6 8
Operating distance
10
10 (cm)
Detection difference withfine acquisition
Detection difference with EASYtouch™ acquisition
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
White 90%
% d
iffere
nce
obje
ct d
ista
nce
Setting distance on white 90% background Setting distance on white 90% background
% d
iffere
nce
obje
ct d
ista
nce
S50-PS 10 cmS50-MS
31
FORE-BACKGROUND SUPPRESSION WITH RED EMISSION
The fore-background suppressionproximity allows to preciselyadjust the minimum and maximumdetec t ion d is tance . TheEASYtouchTM setting procedurefixes automatically the bestdetection conditions, simplypressing once the teach-in push-button, in presence of thereference to detect.
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
Teach-in button for setting.EASYtouch™ provides two setting modes: standard or fine,both obtained by pressing the push-button only once. Pleaserefer to instructions manual for operating details.
CONNECTIONS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
32
C
CB
D E
F
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
B
OUTPUT status andREADY / ERROR LEDs
Teach-in push-button
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
AB
BA
N
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-N03-NN 952001680 NPNS50-PA-2-N03-PP 952001440 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-N03-NN 952021560 NPNS50-MA-2-N03-PP 952021080 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PA-5-N03-NN 952001570 NPNS50-PA-5-N03-PP 952001450 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-MA-5-N03-NN 952021720 NPNS50-MA-5-N03-PP 952021280 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 4 ... 10 cmPower supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 30 mALight emission: red LED 630 nmSpot dimension: approx. 8 mm at 10 cmSetting: teach-in push-button Setting procedure: teach-in EASYtouchTM
Indicators:yellow OUTPUT LED green / red READY / ERROR LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 2 ms Switching frequency: 250 Hz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
5
4
2
S50
-PA
-2-N
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-N
03-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-N
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-N
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-N
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-N
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-N
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-N
03-P
P
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
0 2 4 6 8 10 (cm)
Operating distance
10
Detection hysteresis with EASYtouch™ acquisition
Background suppression area
Detection area
Foreground suppression area
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 (cm)
Distance
Dis
tance
10
6
4
2
0
8
(cm)
12
Note: in the fine acquisition mode, the foreground suppression distanceis nearer to the point where the object has been acquired
S50-PA S50-MA 10 cm
33
FIBRE-OPTIC AMPLIFIER WITH RED EMISSION
The amplifier is built to accept anystandard 2.2 mm Ø fibre-opticwhich can be for either diffused orthrough beam operation. A lockingring when tightened holds thefibres firmly in position. Thesensitivity is adjusted by an IP67rated trimmer. The proximity orthrough beam fibres are mainlyused in applications where space isof a premium and for detection ofsmall objects. Special fibres arealso available for high temperatureand high wear applications. Forfurther information on theextensive range of fibre-opticaccessories please see the OFdatasheet.
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Fibre-optics (A.02), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue.
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
Fibre fixing nut
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
D
C
E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
B
B
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
PLASTIC HOUSING
34
C
B
METAL HOUSING
H
H
B
A
A
E
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-E01-NN 952001650 NPNS50-PA-2-E01-PP 952001130 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-MA-2-E01-NN 952021880 NPNS50-MA-2-E01-PP 952021040 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PA-5-E01-NN 952001540 NPNS50-PA-5-E01-PP 952001140 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-MA-5-E01-NN 952021890 NPNS50-MA-5-E01-PP 952021240 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:proximity 3 cm (OF-42-ST-20 standard fibres) through beam 10 cm (OF-43-ST-20 standard fibres)
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: red LED 660 nmSetting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Fibre fixing nut material: ABSWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
6
5
2
S50
-PA
-2-E
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-E
01-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-E
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-E
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-E
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-E
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-E
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-E
01-P
P2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
5 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
6 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
0 2.5 5 7.5 10 (cm)
Operating distance with standard fibres
Proximty
Through beam
3
10
* standard fibre-optics
Standard fibre-optics:OF-42-ST-20 proximityOF-43-ST-20 through beam
High efficiency fibre-optics or accessorylenses can be used to obtain largeroperating distances. Refer to Fibre-optics (A.02) of the GeneralCatalogue.
Detection area - proximity *Excess gain - proximity *
Excess gain - through beam * Detection area - through beam *
Grey 18%White 90%
White 90%
Grey 18%
S50-PA S50-MA 3/10 cm
35
CONTRAST SENSOR WITH WHITE EMISSION
The white light LED emission isdesigned for the detection of alarge number of coloured or grey-scale contrasts, in order to detectprint registration marks or similar.The EASYtouch TM se t t ingprocedures automatically selectsthe best detection conditions,simply by pressing the teach-inpush-button once, in the presenceof a reference mark. By pressingthe teach-in push-button andholding it down until the greenlight on the rear of the sensorflashes, in the presence of thereference mark and then pressingthe button again in the presence ofthe contrast you wish to ignore, ahigher level of accuracy isobtained.
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Fibre-optics (A.02), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue.
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status andREADY / ERROR LEDs
Teach-in push-button
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Teach-in button for setting.EASYtouch™ provides two setting modes: standard or fine,both obtained by pressing the push-button only once. Pleaserefer to instructions manual for operating details.
CONNECTIONS
A
A
B
B
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
36
C
B
B
C
D E
F
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
W
mm
Sensitivity / operating distance
TECHNICAL DATA
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
SELECTION TABLE
Operating distance: 10 mmDepth of field (max.): ± 2 mmPower supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 25 mALight emission: white LED 400 - 700 nmSpot dimension: approx. 4.5 mm at 10 mmMinimum detectable object: 0.5 mmSetting: teach-in push-button Setting procedure: teach-in EASYtouchTM
Indicators:yellow OUTPUT LED green / red READY / ERROR LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 100 µs Switching frequency: 5 kHz Operating mode:
dark with EASYtouchTM
automatic dark / light with fine acq.Connection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
S50
-PA
-2-W
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-W
03-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-W
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-W
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-W
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-W
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-W
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-W
03-P
P plastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-W03-NN 952001710 NPNS50-PA-2-W03-PP 952001320 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-W03-NN 952021590 NPNS50-MA-2-W03-PP 952021110 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-W03-NN 952001600 NPNS50-PA-5-W03-PP 952001330 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-W03-NN 952021750 NPNS50-MA-5-W03-PP 952021310 PNP
TECHNICAL NOTES
1
3
5
4
2
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
Rela
tive s
ensi
tivity
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
0 4 8 12 (mm)
Operating distance
12
S50-PA S50-MA 10 mm
37
LUMINESCENCE SENSOR WITH UV EMISSION
The UV light LED emission detectsany luminescent reference, evenon very reflective surfaces, such asceramics, metal or mirrored glass.The EASYtouch TM se t t ingprocedures fixes automatically thebest detection conditions, simplyby pressing the teach-in push-button once, with the luminescentobject present. By pressing theteach-in push-button and holding itdown until the green light on therear of the sensor flashes, with theluminescent object present andthen pressing the button again inthe presence of a luminescentreference you wish to ignore, ahigher level of accuracy isobtained.
DIMENSIONS
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Fibre-optics (A.02), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue.
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Teach-in button for setting.EASYtouch™ provides two setting modes: standard or fine,both obtained by pressing the push-button only once. Pleaserefer to instructions manual for operating details.
CONNECTIONS
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
38
C
B
B
D E
F
C
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
OUTPUT status andREADY / ERROR LEDs
Teach-in push-button
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
A
B
B
ACCESSORIES
U
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
SELECTION TABLE
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
plastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-U03-NN 952001700 NPNS50-PA-2-U03-PP 952001300 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-U03-NN 952021580 NPNS50-MA-2-U03-PP 952021100 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-U03-NN 952001590 NPNS50-PA-5-U03-PP 952001310 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-U03-NN 952021740 NPNS50-MA-5-U03-PP 952021300 PNP
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 8 ... 20 mmPower supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 25 mALight emission: UV LED 370 nmSpot dimension: approx. 3 mm at 20 mmMinimum detectable object: 0.5 mmSetting: teach-in push-button Setting procedure: teach-in EASYtouchTM
Indicators:yellow OUTPUT LED green / red READY / ERROR LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 500 µs Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode:
dark with EASYtouchTM
automatic dark / light with fine acq.Connection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
S50
-PA
-2-U
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-U
03-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-U
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-U
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-U
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-U
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-U
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-U
03-P
P
1
3
5
4
2
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
0 4 8 16 20 (mm)
Operating distance
20
Sensitivity / operating distance
Rela
tive s
ensi
tivity
S50-PA S50-MA 20 mm
39
DISTANCE SENSOR WITH RED EMISSION
This sensor gives an analogue0-10 Vdc output proportional to anobject's distance from the face ofthe sensor over a distance of100 mm. The light intensity of theyellow indicator LED at the rear ofthe sensor is proportional to theobject's distance, the red LEDturns on when the object is outsidethe measurement field.
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
CONNECTIONS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
OUTPUT status andfield LEDs
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
C
D
E
F
D
C
E
F
C
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
A
A
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
40
Y
mm
3 Direct proportionality (DIR) is activated when white wire is connected to +Vdc;Inverse proportionality (INV) is activated when white wire is connected to 0 V.The white wire must always be connected.
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 5 ... 10 cmPower supply: 18 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 30 mALight emission: red LED 630 nmSpot dimension: approx. 8 mm at 10 cmIndicators:
yellow proportional OUTPUT LED red field LED
Output type: analogue with 0 ... 10V voltageOutput resistance: 2 kΩLoad resistance: ≥ 20 kΩResponse time: 3,33 ms Switching frequency: 150 Hz Resolution: 1 mm / 200 mVOperating mode: direct / inverse proportionalityConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
6
4
3
5
2
S50
-PA
-2-Y
00-V
K
S50
-PA
-5-Y
00-V
K
S50
-MA
-2-Y
00-V
K
S50
-MA
-5-Y
00-V
K
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-Y00-VK 952001340
metal - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-MA-2-Y00-VK 952021120
plastic - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PA-5-Y00-VK 952001350
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-MA-5-Y00-VK 952021320
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C
1 Limit values
4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
5 Compatible with quick connection systems 6 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on the outputs
0 2 4 6 8 10 (cm)
Operating distance
10
Measurement field ininverse proportionality
Measurement field indirect proportionality
Direct proportionality (DIR)
Tensi
on (
V)
Tensi
on (
V)
Inverse proportionality (INV)
S50-PA 10 cmS50-MA
41
MODEL DESCRIPTION ORDER N°
ST-5010 M18/14 fixing bracket 95ACC5230
ST-5011 M18 fixing bracket 95ACC5240
ST-5012 M18 fixing bracket 95ACC5250
ST-5017 M18 fixing bracket 95ACC5270
S50 EASY-IN M18/14 EASYin™ adjustable fixing support 95ACC5300
JOINT-18 M18 jointed support 95ACC5220
SWING-18 adjustable support for plastic tubular M18 sensors 895000006
MICRO-18 support with micrometric regulation for tubular M18 sensors 95ACC1380
SP-40 fixed support for tubular M18 sensors 95ACC1370
MEK-PROOF front protection G5000001
Refer also to Accessories for Sensors of the General Catalogue
TECHNOLOGY
The series is compatible with all the Datasensor accessories already developed fortubular sensors. In the General Catalogue refer to:- CS connectors - R reflectors- OF fibre-optics - ST fixing brackets New accessories dedicated to the S50 series have been developed to cover all thefixing requirements and to improve the functioning.In particular EASYin™ is an innovative fixing system that can be used only for theplastic flat version, that allows a fast and safe positioning of the sensor, facilitating theadjustment as well as the locking and unlocking.
1
2
3
4
5
Housing and fixing nuts in indeformable plasticproviding excellent resistance against hostileenvironments. Indelible laser marking
A modular product developed for the automation ofthe assembling and testing process necessary toguarantee intrinsic quality, repeatability andreliabil i ty. One-piece-flow management forimproved service
6
7
42
1
2
3
4
5
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES SELECTION TABLE AND ORDER INFORMATION
EASYtouch™ is a Datasensor patent-covered technology that allows a rapid and safe setting of micro-controlledsensors equipped with a teach-in push-button. A pressure longer than two seconds of the push-button allows a goodadjustment of the sensitivity threshold. EASYtouch™ is the easiest and fastest calibration procedure available on themarket. The instructions on how to best use EASYtouch™ are given in the product's instruction manual.
Multi-layer fine-line PCB
Chip-size components, integrated circuits in 8bumps flip-chip
Analogue digital ASIC
Power ASIC for antivalent outputs
M12 custom connector compatible with quickconnection systems. The four terminals are cone-shaped to facilitate the direct insertion in the cableconductors (4 x 0,5 mm2)
7
6
DIMENSIONS ACCESSORIES
JOINT-18
UNI-5931 M6 SCREWS
VERTICAL OPTIC AXIS HORIZONTAL OPTIC AXIS
S50 EASYin™
UNI-7687 M3 SCREWSUNI-7687 M3 SCREWS
43
44
DIMENSIONS ACCESSORIES
ST-5010 ST-5011
ST-5017ST-5012
DIMENSIONS ACCESSORIES
MICRO-18 SWING-18
SP-40 MEK PROOF
glass
45
* 2 nuts are included
PLASTIC FLAT HOUSING WITH LASER RADIAL OPTICS MODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-PH-2-B01-NN 952001950 laser retroreflex 14S50-PH-2-B01-PP 952001940 laser retroreflex 14S50-PH-2-C01-NN 952001990 laser proximity 26S50-PH-2-C01-PP 952001980 laser proximity 26S50-PH-2-F01-NN 952002030 laser receiver 6S50-PH-2-F01-PP 952002020 laser receiver 6S50-PH-2 G00-XG 952002060 laser emitter 6S50-PH-5-B01-NN 952001970 laser retroreflex 14S50-PH-5-B01-PP 952001960 laser retroreflex 14S50-PH-5-C01-NN 952002010 laser proximity 26S50-PH-5-C01-PP 952002000 laser proximity 26S50-PH-5-F01-NN 952002050 laser receiver 6S50-PH-5-F01-PP 952002040 laser receiver 6S50-PH-5-G00-XG 952002070 laser emitter 6
PLASTIC FLAT HOUSING WITH LASER AXIAL OPTICS MODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-PL-2-B01-NN 952001870 laser retroreflex 14S50-PL-2-B01-PP 952001360 laser retroreflex 14S50-PL-2-C01-NN 952001880 laser proximity 26S50-PL-2-C01-PP 952001380 laser proximity 26S50-PL-2-F01-NN 952001890 laser receiver 6S50-PL-2-F01-PP 952001400 laser receiver 6S50-PL-2 G00-XG 952001420 laser emitter 6S50-PL-5-B01-NN 952001840 laser retroreflex 14S50-PL-5-B01-PP 952001370 laser retroreflex 14S50-PL-5-C01-NN 952001850 laser proximity 26S50-PL-5-C01-PP 952001390 laser proximity 26S50-PL-5-F01-NN 952001860 laser receiver 6S50-PL-5-F01-PP 952001410 laser receiver 6S50-PL-5-G00-XG 952001430 laser emitter 6
PLASTIC FLAT HOUSING WITH RADIAL OPTICSMODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-PR-2-B01-NN 952001780 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PR-2-B01-PP 952001030 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PR-2-C01-NN 952001790 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PR-2-C01-PP 952001070 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PR-2-C10-NN 952001800 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PR-2-C10-PP 952001490 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PR-2-D00-NN 952001810 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PR-2-D00-PP 952001110 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PR-2-F01-NN 952001820 receiver 2S50-PR-2-F01-PP 952001170 receiver 2S50-PR-2-G00-XG 952001210 emitter 2S50-PR-2-T01-NN 952001830 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PR-2-T01-PP 952001280 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PR-5-B01-NN 952001720 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PR-5-B01-PP 952001040 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PR-5-C01-NN 952001730 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PR-5-C01-PP 952001080 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PR-5-C10-NN 952001740 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PR-5-C10-PP 952001480 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PR-5-D00-NN 952001750 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PR-5-D00-PP 952001120 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PR-5-F01-NN 952001760 receiver 2S50-PR-5-F01-PP 952001180 receiver 2S50-PR-5-G00-XG 952001220 emitter 2S50-PR-5-T01-NN 952001770 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PR-5-T01-PP 952001290 retroreflex for transparents 16
PLASTIC FLAT HOUSING WITH AXIAL OPTICS MODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-PA-2-A00-NN 952002090 retroreflex 10S50-PA-2-A00-PP 952002080 retroreflex 10S50-PA-2-B01-NN 952001610 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PA-2-B01-PP 952001010 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PA-2-C01-NN 952001620 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PA-2-C01-PP 952001050 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PA-2-C10-NN 952001630 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PA-2-C10-PP 952001240 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PA-2-C21-NN 952002170 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-PA-2-C21-PP 952002160 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-PA-2-D00-NN 952001640 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PA-2-D00-PP 952001090 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PA-2-E01-NN 952001650 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-PA-2-E01-PP 952001130 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-PA-2-F01-NN 952001660 receiver 2S50-PA-2-F01-PP 952001150 receiver 2S50-PA-2-G00-XG 952001190 emitter 2S50-PA-2-M03-NN 952001670 background suppression 28S50-PA-2-M03-PP 952001230 background suppression 28S50-PA-2-N03-NN 952001680 fore-background suppression 32S50-PA-2-N03-PP 952001440 fore-background suppression 32S50-PA-2-T01-NN 952001690 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PA-2-T01-PP 952001260 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PA-2-U03-NN 952001700 luminescence sensor 38S50-PA-2-U03-PP 952001300 luminescence sensor 38S50-PA-2-W03-NN 952001710 contrast sensor 36S50-PA-2-W03-PP 952001320 contrast sensor 36S50-PA-2-Y00-VK 952001340 distance sensor 40S50-PA-5-A00-NN 952002110 retroreflex 10S50-PA-5-A00-PP 952002100 retroreflex 10S50-PA-5-B01-NN 952001500 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PA-5-B01-PP 952001020 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PA-5-C01-NN 952001510 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PA-5-C01-PP 952001060 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PA-5-C10-NN 952001520 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PA-5-C10-PP 952001250 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PA-5-C21-NN 952002190 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-PA-5-C21-PP 952002180 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-PA-5-D00-NN 952001530 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PA-5-D00-PP 952001100 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PA-5-E01-NN 952001540 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-PA-5-E01-PP 952001140 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-PA-5-F01-NN 952001550 receiver 2S50-PA-5-F01-PP 952001160 receiver 2S50-PA-5-G00-XG 952001200 emitter 2S50-PA-5-M03-NN 952001560 background suppression 28S50-PA-5-M03-PP 952001000 background suppression 28S50-PA-5-N03-NN 952001570 fore-background suppression 32S50-PA-5-N03-PP 952001450 fore-background suppression 32S50-PA-5-T01-NN 952001580 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PA-5-T01-PP 952001270 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PA-5-U03-NN 952001590 luminescence sensor 38S50-PA-5-U03-PP 952001310 luminescence sensor 38S50-PA-5-W03-NN 952001600 contrast sensor 36S50-PA-5-W03-PP 952001330 contrast sensor 36S50-PA-5-Y00-VK 952001350 distance sensor 40
PLASTIC FLAT HOUSING WITH LATERAL OPTICSMODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-PS-2-M03-NN 952001900 background suppression 30S50-PS-2-M03-PP 952001910 background suppression 30S50-PS-5-M03-NN 952001920 background suppression 30S50-PS-5-M03-PP 952001930 background suppression 30
MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX
46
METAL CYLINDRICAL HOUSING WITH LASER AXIAL OPTICSMODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-ML-2-B01-NN 952021820 laser retroreflex 14S50-ML-2-B01-PP 952021400 laser retroreflex 14S50-ML-2-C01-NN 952021830 laser proximity 26S50-ML-2-C01-PP 952021410 laser proximity 26S50-ML-2-F01-NN 952021840 laser receiver 8S50-ML-2-F01-PP 952021420 laser receiver 8S50-ML-2-G00-XG 952021430 laser emitter 8S50-ML-5-B01-NN 952021850 laser retroreflex 14S50-ML-5-B01-PP 952021440 laser retroreflex 14S50-ML-5-C01-NN 952021860 laser proximity 26S50-ML-5-C01-PP 952021450 laser proximity 26S50-ML-5-F01-NN 952021870 laser receiver 8S50-ML-5-F01-PP 952021460 laser receiver 8S50-ML-5-G00-XG 952021470 laser emitter 8
METAL CYLINDRICAL HOUSING WITH RADIAL OPTICSMODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-MR-2-B01-NN 952021600 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MR-2-B01-PP 952021140 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MR-2-C01-NN 952021610 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MR-2-C01-PP 952021150 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MR-2-C10-NN 952021620 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MR-2-C10-PP 952021490 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MR-2-D00-NN 952021630 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MR-2-D00-PP 952021160 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MR-2-F01-NN 952021640 receiver 4S50-MR-2-F01-PP 952021170 receiver 4S50-MR-2-G00-XG 952021180 emitter 4S50-MR-2-T01-NN 952021650 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MR-2-T01-PP 952021190 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MR-5-B01-NN 952021760 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MR-5-B01-PP 952021340 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MR-5-C01-NN 952021770 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MR-5-C01-PP 952021350 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MR-5-C10-NN 952021780 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MR-5-C10-PP 952021480 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MR-5-D00-NN 952021790 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MR-5-D00-PP 952021360 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MR-5-F01-NN 952021800 receiver 4S50-MR-5-F01-PP 952021370 receiver 4S50-MR-5-G00-XG 952021380 emitter 4S50-MR-5-T01-NN 952021810 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MR-5-T01-PP 952021390 retroreflex for transparents 16
METAL CYLINDRICAL HOUSING WITH AXIAL OPTICS MODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-MA-2-A00-NN 952022090 retroreflex 10S50-MA-2-A00-PP 952022080 retroreflex 10S50-MA-2-B01-NN 952021500 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MA-2-B01-PP 952021000 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MA-2-C01-NN 952021510 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MA-2-C01-PP 952021010 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MA-2-C10-NN 952021520 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MA-2-C10-PP 952021020 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MA-2-C21-NN 952022130 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-MA-2-C21-PP 952022120 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-MA-2-D00-NN 952021530 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MA-2-D00-PP 952021030 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MA-2-E01-NN 952021880 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-MA-2-E01-PP 952021040 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-MA-2-F01-NN 952021540 receiver 4S50-MA-2-F01-PP 952021050 receiver 4S50-MA-2-G00-XG 952021060 emitter 4S50-MA-2-M03-NN 952021550 background suppression 28S50-MA-2-M03-PP 952021070 background suppression 28S50-MA-2-N03-NN 952021560 fore-background suppression 32S50-MA-2-N03-PP 952021080 fore-background suppression 32S50-MA-2-T01-NN 952021570 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MA-2-T01-PP 952021090 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MA-2-U03-NN 952021580 luminescence sensor 38S50-MA-2-U03-PP 952021100 luminescence sensor 38S50-MA-2-W03-NN 952021590 contrast sensor 36S50-MA-2-W03-PP 952021110 contrast sensor 36S50-MA-2-Y00-VK 952021120 distance sensor 40S50-MA-5-A00-NN 952022110 retroreflex 10S50-MA-5-A00-PP 952022100 retroreflex 10S50-MA-5-B01-NN 952021660 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MA-5-B01-PP 952021200 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MA-5-C01-NN 952021670 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MA-5-C01-PP 952021210 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MA-5-C10-NN 952021680 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MA-5-C10-PP 952021220 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MA-5-C21-NN 952022150 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-MA-5-C21-PP 952022140 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-MA-5-D00-NN 952021690 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MA-5-D00-PP 952021230 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MA-5-E01-NN 952021890 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-MA-5-E01-PP 952021240 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-MA-5-F01-NN 952021700 receiver 4S50-MA-5-F01-PP 952021250 receiver 4S50-MA-5-G00-XG 952021260 emitter 4S50-MA-5-M03-NN 952021710 background suppression 28S50-MA-5-M03-PP 952021270 background suppression 28S50-MA-5-N03-NN 952021720 fore-background suppression 32S50-MA-5-N03-PP 952021280 fore-background suppression 32S50-MA-5-T01-NN 952021730 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MA-5-T01-PP 952021290 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MA-5-U03-NN 952021740 luminescence sensor 38S50-MA-5-U03-PP 952021300 luminescence sensor 38S50-MA-5-W03-NN 952021750 contrast sensor 36S50-MA-5-W03-PP 952021310 contrast sensor 36S50-MA-5-Y00-VK 952021320 distance sensor 40
METAL CYLINDRICAL HOUSING WITH LASER RADIAL OPTICSMODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-MH-2-B01-NN 952021940 laser retroreflex 14S50-MH-2-B01-PP 952021950 laser retroreflex 14S50-MH-2-C01-NN 952021990 laser proximity 26S50-MH-2-C01-PP 952021980 laser proximity 26S50-MH-2-F01-NN 952022030 laser receiver 8S50-MH-2-F01-PP 952022020 laser receiver 8S50-MH-2-G00-XG 952022060 laser emitter 8S50-MH-5-B01-NN 952021970 laser retroreflex 14S50-MH-5-B01-PP 952021960 laser retroreflex 14S50-MH-5-C01-NN 952022010 laser proximity 26S50-MH-5-C01-PP 952022000 laser proximity 26S50-MH-5-F01-NN 952022050 laser receiver 8S50-MH-5-F01-PP 952022040 laser receiver 8S50-MH-5-G00-XG 952022070 laser emitter 8
METAL CYLINDRICAL HOUSING WITH LATERAL OPTICSMODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-MS-2-M03-NN 952021900 background suppression 30S50-MS-2-M03-PP 952021910 background suppression 30S50-MS-5-M03-NN 952021920 background suppression 30S50-MS-5-M03-PP 952021930 background suppression 30
47
MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX
S 5 0 - P A - 2 - B 0 1 - N N
MODEL CODING TABLE
Note: Not all code combinations are available. Please refer to alphabetical model index for the list of available models.
HEADQUARTERS
DATASENSOR SpAvia Lavino, 265 - 40050 Monte San Pietro, BO - ItalyTel. +39 051/6765611 • Fax +39 051/6759324 www.datasensor.com • e-mail [email protected]
UN
IVE
RS
AL
TU
BU
LA
R S
EN
SO
RS
Datasensor SpA endeavours to continuously improve and renew its products; for this reason thetechnical data and contents of this catalogue may undergo variations without prior notice. For correctinstallation and use Datasensor SpA can guarantee only the data indicated in the instruction manualsupplied with the products. P
rin
ted
in It
aly
in O
cto
ber
200
7R
ev. 0
6
UNI EN ISO9001 UNI EN ISO14000
Distributed by:
HOUSING P = plastic flatM = metal cylindrical
OPTICSA = axialH = laser radialL = laser axial R = radialS = lateral
CONNECTION2 = cable5 = M12 connector
OPTIC FUNCTION refer to MODELALPHABETICALINDEX
SETTING0 = fixed1 = trimmer 3 = teach-in
push-button
INPUTS / OUTPUTS NN = NPN NO-NC outputsPP = PNP NO-NC outputsXG = no output - test inputVK = 0 - 10 Vdc output with
dir/inv sel. input
COAXIAL POLARISED RETROREFLEX FOR TRANSPARENTS
The high sensitivity and reducedhysterisis of this retroreflex sensorallow to detect even the slightestattenuat ion of the received lightemission, caused by the presenceof transparent objects, such asglass or PET bottles or plastic filmsheets for packaging. The presenceof polarisation filters avoids falseswitching on shiny surfaces andthe coaxial optics improves thedetection precision on the entireoperating range.
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Reflectors (A.01), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing Brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS Output status LED
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
A
B
C
D
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate clockwise to increase the operating distance.
12
T
A
C
C
D
S60-PA-5S60-PA-2
B
A
BROWN
WHITE
BLACK
BLUE
NO OUTPUT
Vdc
NC OUTPUT
0V -(BLUE)
(WHITE)
+ 10 ... 30 Vdc(BROWN)
(BLACK)
NO OUTPUT
NC OUTPUT
1 Limit values2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° trimmer4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
SELECTION TABLEcoaxial optics - 2 m cable S60-PA-2-T51-NN 956201530 NPNS60-PA-2-T51-PP 956201380 PNP
coaxial optics - M12 connectorS60-PA-5-T51-NN 956201250 NPNS60-PA-5-T51-PP 956201100 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 0 ... 2 m Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 40 mALight emission: red LED 660 nmSpot dimension: aprox. 50 mm at 1.5 mSetting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators: yellow OUTPUT LED Output type:
PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 500 µs Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material: ABSLens materiale: window in glass (tilted anti-reflection)Weight:
90 g max. 40 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
S60
-PA
-2-T
51-N
N
S60
-PA
-2-T
51-P
P
S60
-PA
-5-T
51-N
N
S60
-PA
-5-T
51-P
P
0,50 1 1,5 2 (m)
R2 1,5
Recommended operating distanceMaximum operating distance
R5
1,4
TECHNICAL NOTES
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
Detection areaExcess gain
1,7 2
1,7
R2
R5
R2
R5
2 m
5 Connector can be blocked on two positions 6 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on outputs
7 Internal lenses in glass
13
II3D
S2Z SERIESThe new S2Z Maxi series offers 4models, with basic optic functions: - through beam - polarized retroreflex - diffuse proximity- background suppression Versions with continuous and free-voltage Vac. Adjustable timingversions are also available.SPDT relay and bipolar transistorNPN/PNP open collector outputsare also offered.Terminal block connectionsimplif ies and speeds-upinstallation. The heavy-dutyplastic housing guaranteesexcellent resistance in the mostsevere working conditions.
HIGHLIGHTS
• IP67 mechanical protection
• Timing versions
• Terminal block connection
• Versions with continuous and
multi-voltage power supply
• Anti-interference system
• Shock-resistant housing ideal for
severe working conditions
CARATTERISTICHE
Conveyors
APPLICATIONS
www.automation.datalogic.com
SE
NS
OR
S
SENSORSMAXI SENSORS
Automotive industry
Automatic warehouses
CONNECTIONS
Receiver B/C model
Emitter C model
Emitter B model
Emitter M model
F/G model
DIMENSIONS
www.automation.datalogic.com
The M model presents a multi-turn adjustment screw for theadjustment of the backgroundsuppression distance through amechanical variation of the optictriangulation angle. The othermodels have a mono-turnelectronic trimmer that adjuststhe sensitivity and the sensoroperating distance. The operatingdistance increases, rotating thescrews in a clockwise direction.The output activation anddeactivation delay time can beadjusted by a trimmer that canvary from 0.1 to 5 sec. and thesensor functioning mode can beselected thanks to a ten-positionselector.
mm
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
OUTPUT LED (yellow)
STABILITY LED (green)
Adjustment screw (only M model)
Sensitivity trimmer (B/C/F/G model)
Timing control
Operating mode selector
D
E
F
E
F
INDICATORS
SETTING
MULTI-VOLTAGE MODELS
CONTINUOUS MODELS
S2Z…B/C/F/M S2Z…G
S2Z…B/C/F/M S2Z…G
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS S2Z-F/G S2Z-B S2Z-C S2Z-M
Emission type: IR LED red LED IR LED
Operating distances (typical values): 50m 0.2…7m 1m 0.2…2m
Setting: Mono-turn sensitivity trimmer Multi-turn distance
adjustment screw
White/Black difference (90% / 4%) < 35%
Hysteresis on 90% white: ≤ 20% ≤ 15%
Indicators: OUTPUT LED (yellow) OUTPUT LED
STABILITY LED (green) (yellow)
Operating temperature: -25…50°C
Storage temperature: -40…70°C
Dielectric strength: 500Vac 1 min between electronics and housing
Insulating resistance: >20MΩ 500 Vdc between electronics and housing
Ambient light rejection: according to EN 60947-5-2
Vibrations: 0.5mm width, 10 … 55Hz frequency, for each axis (EN60068-2-6)
Shock resistance: 11ms (30G) 6 shocks for each axis (EN60068-2-27)
Housing material: PBT
Lens material: PC/PET PMMA PC/PET PMMA/PC
Mechanical protection: IP67 (IEC / EN60529) / NEMA TYPE 1 (For UL / c-UL)
Connections: Terminal block (recommended cable diameter between 8 and 10 mm)
MULTI-VOLTAGE MODELS S2Z-F/G S2Z-B S2Z-C S2Z-M
Power supply: 24…240Vac / 12…240Vdc
Ripple: 10% max
Consumption (output current excluded): 3VA max 3VA max
(G model)
3VA max
(F model)
Outputs: SPDT electromagnetic relay: 250Vac, 30Vdc
Output current: 3A (resistance load)
Response time: 20ms max
Switching frequency: 25Hz
Weight: 115g (G mod) 130g
130g (F mod)
CONTINUOUS MODELS S2Z-F/G S2Z-B S2Z-C S2Z-M
Power supply: 12…24Vdc
Ripple: 10% max
Consumption (output current excluded): 20mA max 30mA max.
(G model)
25mA max
(F model)
Outputs: PNP and NPN open collector
Output current: 100 mA (resistance load)
Output saturation voltage: 2.4V max
Response time: 1ms max
Switching frequency: 500Hz
Weight: 105g (G mod) 110g
110g (F mod)
TECHNICAL DATA
www.automation.datalogic.com
TIMING FUNCTION DIAGRAM
Four selectable timing functions: one shot, ON delay, OFF delay and normal mode. Thefunctions can be adjusted, using a trimmer, from 0.1 to 5 seconds.
The timing functions can be particularly useful in applications where the output signal pulse hasto be modified.
Through beam
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
m
cm
Diffuse proximity
mm
mm
Polarized retroreflex on R2 reflector
mm
mm
Background suppression
mm
%
6% black /90% white
18% grey /90% white
90% white
18% grey
Other modelsThrough beam
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
200 40 60 80 (m)
7050
20 4 6 8 10 (m)
S2Z-M
S2Z-B
2
S2Z-C1
2.1
1.2
7 9
MODEL POWER SUPPLY DELAY OUTPUT N° ORDERS2Z-PA-1-B01-RX Vac/Vdc Relay 95B051000S2Z-PA-1-B06-RX Vac/Vdc • Relay 95B051010S2Z-PA-5-B01-OX Vdc PNP/NPN transistor 95B051020S2Z-PA-5-B06-OX Vdc • PNP/NPN transistor 95B051030S2Z-PA-1-M01-RX Vac/Vdc Relay 95B051040S2Z-PA-1-M06-RX Vac/Vdc • Relay 95B051050S2Z-PA-5-M01-OX Vdc PNP/NPN transistor 95B051060S2Z-PA-5-M06-OX Vdc • PNP/NPN transistor 95B051070 S2Z-PA-1-C01-RX Vac/Vdc Relay 95B051080S2Z-PA-1-C06-RX Vac/Vdc • Relay 95B051090S2Z-PA-5-C01-OX Vdc PNP/NPN transistor 95B051100S2Z-PA-5-C06-OX Vdc • PNP/NPN transistor 95B051110S2Z-PA-1-FG01-RX Vac/Vdc Relay 95B051130S2Z-PA-1-FG06-R Vac/Vdc • Relay 95B051140S2Z-PA-5-FG01-OX Vdc PNP/NPN transistor 95B051160S2Z-PA-5-FG06-OX Vdc • PNP/NPN transistor 95B051170
The company endeavours to continuously improve and renew its products; for this reason the technical data and contents of this catalogue may undergo variationswithout prior notice. For correct installation and use, the company can guarantee only the data indicated in the instruction manual supplied with the products.
Printed in Italy in May 2009, Rev. 00
www.datasensor.comwww.automation.datalogic.com
MODEL SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
CO
NT
RA
ST
SE
NS
OR
S
The TL10 series is composed of analog contrast sensors with incandescent lampemission with long life and easy interchangeability.The sensors present a mechanical multi-turn optic adjuster for the sensitivityregulation, a switch for the dark/light operating mode selection and a red LED thatsignals the NPN transistor output activation. Different models are available with 8, 28 and 50 mm lenses.
TL10 SERIES
ANALOGUE SENSORS WITH LAMP EMISSION
• Incandescent lamp emission • Optic adjustment of the sensitivity• 8, 28 and 50 mm lenses available • Dark/light mode selector
The sensors of the TL10 series and relative accessories are available as spare parts. Contrast sensors of the TLµ series are recommended for replacements, newapplications and improved performances.
TECHNICAL DATA DETECTION DIAGRAMSPower supply: ............................................... 10 ... 30 Vdc, reverse polarity protection
4.5 Vac for lamp emission
Consumption: ............................................... 50 mA max.
Light emission: ............................................. 4.5 V (0,8 A) incandescent lamp
Spot dimension: ........................................... 5 x 1 mm (8 mm lens)
6 x 2.5 mm (28 mm lens)
8 x 2.5 mm (50 mm lens)
Operating distance: ...................................... 8 ... 12 mm (8 mm lens)
28 ... 36 mm (28 mm lens)
46 ... 54 mm (50 mm lens)
Depth of field: ............................................... ±2 mm (8 mm lens)
±4 mm (28 and 50 mm lenses)
Setting: .......................................................... mechanical multi-turn actuator
Indicators: ..................................................... red OUTPUT LED
Output type: .................................................. NPN
Saturation voltage: ....................................... 1.4 V max.
Output current: ............................................. 100 mA max., short-circuit protection
Response time: .............................................50 µs max.
Switching frequency: ................................... 10 KHz max.
Operating mode : ..........................................dark/light selectable
Connection: ...................................................3 m Ø 5.5 mm cable
cable with Amphenol connector
Electrical protection: ....................................class 1
Mechanical protection: ................................ IP67
Housing material: ......................................... ZAMA
Lens material: ............................................... glass
Weight: .......................................................... 600 g max.
Operating temperature: ................................-10 ... +55°C
Storage temperature: ................................... -20 ... +70°C
Fibre operating temperature: ...................... -30 ... +60°C
Reference standard: ..................................... EN 60947-5-2
Certifications: ...............................................
The operating distances indicate the detection distance with excess gain 2.
28 mm lens
8 mm lens
50 mm lens
The detection diagrams indicate the typicaloperating distance with excess gain 1.
UNI EN ISO9001 UNI EN ISO14000
CONNECTIONS
DIMENSIONS
CABLE VERSIONS
28 mm lens
50 mm lens
AMPHENOL CONNECTOR VERSIONS
mm
46
50
Ø 4
8.5
M20x0
.75
Ø 3
3
42
M20x0
.75
6
44
CO
NT
RA
ST
SE
NS
OR
S
MODEL DESCRIPTION CODE N°
010066 6V/6W lamp vertical spot (standard vers.) S2600030
010067 6V/6W lamp horizontal spot (90° vers.) S2610300
Please refer also to Sensor Accessories
MODEL OPTICS SPOT CONNECTION OUTPUT CODE N°
TL10-011 8 mm vertical cable NPN S917660100
TL10-012 8 mm vertical Amphenol connector NPN S917660105
TL10-011L 8 mm horizontal cable NPN S917660102
TL10-021 28 mm vertical cable NPN S917660101
TL10-031 50 mm vertical cable NPN S917660103
MODEL SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
ACCESSORY SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
Distributed by:
Pri
nte
d in
Ital
y in
Ju
ly 2
005
Rev
. 02
The sensors of the TL10 series and relative accessories are available as spare parts. Contrast sensors of the TLµ series are recommended for replacements, newapplications and improved performances.
HEADQUARTERS
DATASENSOR SpAvia Lavino, 265 - 40050 Monte San Pietro, BO - ItalyTel. +39 051/6765611 • Fax +39 051/6759324 www.datasensor.com • e-mail [email protected]
Datasensor SpA endeavours to continuously improve and renew its products; for this reason thetechnical data and contents of this catalogue may undergo variations without prior notice. For correctinstallation and use Datasensor SpA can guarantee only the data indicated in the instruction manualsupplied with the products.
CO
NT
RA
ST
SE
NS
OR
S
• Red or green selectable LED emission • Threshold setting with multi-turn trimmer • 9, 18, 28 mm lenses and fibre-optics available • Selectable NPN/PNP output and dark/light mode
The TL80 series is composed of analog-based contast sensors with LEDemission, distinguished by good depth of field and high switching frequencyreaching 10 kHz.Switching threshold setting is aided by two arrow indicators showing the multiturntrimmer’s rotation direction; moreover switches for the selection of the red orgreen emission, dark or light operating mode, NPN or PNP output and timingfunction are also present.Accessory lenses for different operating distances and various proximity andthrough beam fibre-optics extend the application possibilities. The sturdy metalhousing guarantees IP67 protection.
TL80 SERIES
ANALOG SENSORS WITH LED EMISSION
The sensors of the TL80 series and relative accessories are available as spare parts. Contrast sensors of the TLµ series are recommended for replacements, newapplications and improved performances.
TECHNICAL DATA DETECTION DIAGRAMSPower supply: ............................................... 10 ... 30 Vdc, reverse polarity protection
Consumption: ............................................... 80 mA max.
Light emission: ............................................. red 630 nm / green 526 nm LED
Spot dimension: ........................................... 1.5 x 5 mm (9 mm lens)
2 x 7 mm (18 mm lens)
3 x 10 mm (28 mm lens)
Operating distance: ...................................... 7 ... 11 mm (9 mm lens)
16 ... 20 mm (18 mm lens)
25 ... 31 mm (28 mm lens)
Operating distance with fibre-optics: ......... 0 ... 5 mm proximity
0 ... 15 mm through beam
Depth of field: ............................................... ±2 mm (9 and 18 mm lenses)
±3 mm (28 mm lens)
Setting: .......................................................... multi-turn trimmer
Indicators: ..................................................... red OUTPUT LED
red LEDs for trimmer rotation direction
Output type: .................................................. NPN or PNP, Rpull-down/up 10 kΩ
Saturation voltage: ....................................... 1.2 V max. (NPN vers.)
2.2 V max. (PNP vers.)
Output current: ............................................. 200 mA max.; short-circuit protection
Response time: .............................................50 µs (8, 18 mm, fibre-optic vers.)
166 µs (28 mm vers.)
Switching frequency: ................................... 10 KHz max. (8, 18 mm, fibre-optic vers.)
3.3 KHz max. (28 mm vers.)
Operating mode: ...........................................dark/light selectable
Analog output range: ................................... 0 ... 5.5 Vdc (2 Vdc on white 90%)
2.2 kΩ output resistance
Timing function: ........................................... 20 ms minimum output ON
Connection: ...................................................M12 4-pole conn., 3 m Ø 5 mm cable
or cable with Amphenol connector
Electrical protection: ....................................class 1
Mechanical protection: ................................ IP67
Housing material: ......................................... ZAMA
Lens material: ............................................... glass
Fibre-optic material: ..................................... fibre in glass / sheath in metal
fibre in PMMA / sheath in PE (OF-30)
Weight: .......................................................... 550 g max.
Operating temerature: .................................. -10 ... +55°C
Storage temperature: ................................... -20 ... +70°C
Fibre operating temperature: ...................... -30 ... +150°C (glass OF vers.)
-30 ... +60°C (OF-30)
Reference standard: ..................................... EN 60947-5-2
Certifications: ...............................................
18 mm lens
9 mm lens
28 mm lens
Proximity fibre-optics
Through beam fibre-optics
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
%
%
%
%
UNI EN ISO9001 UNI EN ISO14000
CONNECTIONS
DIMENSIONS
mm
M12 CONNECTOR
AMPHENOL CONNECTOR VERSIONS
OF-35
OPTIC FIBRES
OF-30
OF-31
OF-32
OF-33
OF-34
2.512.5 12.5 27.5
50035
Ø 3
M4
12.5+0-0.1
1000
35
Ø 8
Ø 2.5M6
12.5+0-0.11000
35
Ø 8
3
1
M6
12.5+0-0.11000
35
Ø 8
Ø 1.6
M6
12.5+0-0.1
12.5+0-0.1
1000
1000
35
35
1
88
3
3
13.4
M5x5 n°8
21
30
87
41.5
28
36
.5
62.5
58.5
Ø 5
Ø 25
Ø 25
Ø 33
24
15.5
4
744.5
75
28
CO
NT
RA
ST
SE
NS
OR
S
MODEL DESCRIPTION CODE N°
OF-30-5 plastic fibre-optic L 50 cm - point-shaped spot proximity 96B001070
OF-31-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - point-shaped spot proximity 96B201000
OF-32-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - rectangular spot proximity 96B211000
OF-33-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - through beam 96B221000
OF-34-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - horizontal spot 90° proximity 96B231000
OF-35-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - vertical spot 90° proximity 96B241000
Please refer also to Sensor Accessories
MODEL SPOT OPTICS CONNECTION CODE N°
TL80-011 vertical 9 mm cable 964051000
TL80-011L horizontal 9 mm cable 964051010
TL80-012 vertical 9 mm Amphenol connector 964051020
TL80-012L horizontal 9 mm Amphenol connector 964051030
TL80-015 vertical 9 mm M12 connector 964051040
TL80-015L horizontal 9 mm M12 connector 964051050
TL80-061 vertical 18 mm cable 964051180
TL80-065 vertical 18 mm M12 connector 964051220
TL80-021 vertical 28 mm cable 964051060
TL80-025 vertical 28 mm M12 connector 964051100
TL80F-041 refer to fibers optic fibre cable 964051120
TL80F-042 refer to fibers optic fibre Amphenol connector 964051130
TL80F-045 refer to fibers optic fibre M12 connector 964051140
MODEL SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
ACCESSORY SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
Distributed by:
Pri
nte
d in
Ital
y in
Ju
ly 2
005
Rev
. 04
HEADQUARTERS
DATASENSOR SpAvia Lavino, 265 - 40050 Monte San Pietro, BO - ItalyTel. +39 051/6765611 • Fax +39 051/6759324 www.datasensor.com • e-mail [email protected]
Datasensor SpA endeavours to continuously improve and renew its products; for this reason thetechnical data and contents of this catalogue may undergo variations without prior notice. For correctinstallation and use Datasensor SpA can guarantee only the data indicated in the instruction manualsupplied with the products.
The sensors of the TL80 series and relative accessories are available as spare parts. Contrast sensors of the TLµ series are recommended for replacements, newapplications and improved performances.
UN
IVE
RS
AL
MA
XI S
EN
SO
RS
• Sensitivity adjustment and Stability LED• Free voltage power supply and relay output • 10-30 Vdc power supply with NPN and PNP outputs • Versions with 5 timing functions
The photoelectric sensors of the S2 series are enclosed in sturdy plastic housings,developed to guarantee the complete protection of the control panel andconnection terminals. The free voltage versions present a relay output, while the 10-30 Vdc versionshave a double NPN and PNP output, both available with 1 or 2 m proximity, 5 mpolarised retroreflex, 3 m polarised retroreflex and 10 or 50 m through beam opticfunctions.The red output LED and the green stability LED are visible through the IP66hermetically-sealed cover, that also protects the terminal block and commands,such as the sensitivity adjustment trimmer and dark/light operating mode selector.The versions with output timing present a trimmer to regulate the time up to 16 s.and a selector to set 5 different functions.
S2 SERIES
MULTI-FUNCTION SENSORS
TECHNICAL DATA DETECTION DIAGRAMSPower supply: ............................................... 10 ... 30 Vdc, reverse polarity protection
15 ... 264 Vac/Vdc
Consumption: ............................................... 30 mA max. (d.c. vers.)
3 VA max. (a.c. vers.)
Light emission: ............................................. infrared LED 880 nm
red LED 660 nm (B vers.)
Diffuse proximity operating distance: ........ 1 ... 90 cm (C90 vers.)
1 ... 200 cm (C200 vers.)
Retroreflex operating distance: .................. 0.1 ... 5 m (on R2)
Polarised retroreflex operating distance: .. 0.15 ... 3 m (on R2)
Through beam operating distance: ............ 0 ... 10 m (G10/F10 vers.)
0 ... 50 m (G50/F50 vers.)
Setting: .......................................................... sensitivity trimmer
Indicators: ..................................................... red OUTPUT LED
green STABILITY LED
Output type: .................................................. NPN and PNP, open collector (d.c. vers.)
or relay 1 NO contact (a.c. vers.)
Saturation voltage: ....................................... 1 V max. (NPN vers.)
2 V max. (PNP vers.)
Output current: ............................................. 100 mA max., short-circuit protection
relay 1 A (250 Vac), resistive load
Response time: .............................................1 ms max. (d.c. vers.)
20 ms max. (a.c. vers.)
Switching frequency: ................................... 500 Hz max. (d.c. vers.)
25 Hz max. (a.c. vers.)
Timing function: ........................................... normal, ON-delay, OFF-delay, ON/OFF-
delay, one-shot all adjustable from 0.6
to 16 sec.
Operating mode: ...........................................dark/light selectable
Connection: ...................................................terminal block with 4 screw terminals
gland for cables with 8 to 10 mm diameter
Electrical protection: ................................... class 1 (a.c. vers.)
class 2 (d.c. vers.)
Mechanical protection: ................................ IP66
Housing material: ......................................... PBT plastic
Lens material: ............................................... PMMA plastic
Weight: .......................................................... 100 g max.
Operating temperature: ................................-25 ... +55°C
Storage temperature: ................................... -25 ... +70°C
Reference standard: ..................................... EN 60947-5-2
Certifications: ...............................................
The operating distances indicate the detection distance with excess gain 2.
S2-x-C200-x
S2-x-C90-x
S2-x-B3-x
S2-x-F10/G10
S2-x-F50/G50
White R90%Grey R18%
White R90%
R5R2
Grey R18%
S2-x-A5-x
R5R2
The detection diagrams indicate the typicaloperating distance with excess gain 1.
UNI EN ISO9001 UNI EN ISO14000
CONNECTIONS
DIMENSIONS
S2-5-A/B/C/F S2-5-G
S2-1-A/B/C/F S2-1-G
mm
UN
IVE
RS
AL
MA
XI S
EN
SO
RS
VERSIONS WITH 15 ... 264 Vac/Vdc POWER SUPPLYMODEL FUNCTION OUTPUT CODE N°
S2-1-C90 proximity relay J950530390
S2-1-C90T proximity relay with timer J950535390
S2-1-C200 proximity relay J950530393
S2-1-C200T proximity relay with timer J950535393
S2-1-A5 retroreflex relay J950330390
S2-1-A5T retroreflex relay with timer J950335390
S2-1-B3 polarised retroreflex relay J950320390
S2-1-B3T polarised retroreflex relay with timer J950325390
S2-1-F10 receiver relay J950200390
S2-1-F10T receiver relay with timer J950205390
S2-1-F50 receiver relay J950200394
S2-1-F50T receiver relay with timer J950205394
S2-1-G10 emitter - J950139990
S2-1-G50 emitter - J950139995
VERSIONS WITH 10 ... 30 Vdc POWER SUPPLYMODEL FUNCTION OUTPUT CODE N°
S2-5-C90 proximity NPN/PNP J950530000
S2-5-C90T proximity NPN/PNP with timer J950535000
S2-5-C200 proximity NPN/PNP J950530003
S2-5-C200T proximity NPN/PNP with timer J950535003
S2-5-A5 retroreflex NPN/PNP J950330000
S2-5-A5T retroreflex NPN/PNP with timer J950335000
S2-5-B3 polarised retroreflex NPN/PNP J950320000
S2-5-B3T polarised retroreflex NPN/PNP with timer J950325000
S2-5-F10 receiver NPN/PNP J950200000
S2-5-F10T receiver NPN/PNP with timer J950205000
S2-5-F50 receiver NPN/PNP J950200004
S2-5-F50T receiver NPN/PNP with timer J950205004
S2-5-G10 emitter - J950139900
S2-5-G50 emitter - J950139905
MODEL SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
Distributed by:
Pri
nte
d in
Ital
y in
Ju
ly 2
005
Rev
. 02
HEADQUARTERS
DATASENSOR SpAvia Lavino, 265 - 40050 Monte San Pietro, BO - ItalyTel. +39 051/6765611 • Fax +39 051/6759324 www.datasensor.com • e-mail [email protected]
Datasensor SpA endeavours to continuously improve and renew its products; for this reason thetechnical data and contents of this catalogue may undergo variations without prior notice. For correctinstallation and use Datasensor SpA can guarantee only the data indicated in the instruction manualsupplied with the products.
UN
IVE
RS
AL
TU
BU
LA
R S
EN
SO
RS
• Complete range of optic functions, universal, applicationand laser class 1
• Flat plastic tubular housing for improved versatility ormetal cylindrical housing
• Versions with axial or radial optics, with fixed, trimmer orEASYtouch™ teach-in adjustment
• Cable or M12 connection with EN standard NPN or PNPNO-NC configuration
The S50 series offers all optical functions within a M18 housing. With the universal sensing functions of proximity, polarised retroreflex and throughbeam, which are also available with class 1 laser emission, as well as the moreadvanced functions of background suppression, background/foregroundsuppression, analogue displacement, contrast and luminescence, the S50 really isone housing for all applications.The S50 setting is carried out-by either by potentiometer, which is sealed to IP67,or using the patented EASYtouch™ push-button teach system, which gives rapidand precise automatic setting of the switching points.The S50 series is available both in flat plastic format ideal for M18 nut or screwmounting through the sensor body, as well as a cylindrical metal housing. Axial orradial optics are available in both housings with integral cable or M12 connectionconforming to EN 60947-5-2, the European wiring standard. The performance,versatility and extensive optical sensing options, positions the S50 series as thenew bench mark for customers focused on the evolution of technology anddevelopment of standards.
S50 SERIES
M18 MULTIFUNCTION OPTOELECTRONICSENSORS
one for all
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andstability LEDs (receiver);power on LED (emitter)
Adjustment tr immer(receiver)
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
B
B
F
F
D
C C
CC
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
THROUGH BEAM WITH INFRARED EMISSION
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
EMITTER
RECEIVER
B
EMITTER
S50-PA/PR-5S50-PA/PR-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
RECEIVER
RADIAL OPTICS
2
A
Longer operating distances can beobtained utilising separate emitterand receiver units. The infraredemission is modulated to avoidinterference with other lightsources and the emitter is fittedwith test inputs for remote systeminterrogation.
G/F
mm
receiver - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-PA-2-F01-NN 952001660 NPNS50-PA-2-F01-PP 952001150 PNP
emitter - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-PA-2-G00-XG 952001190
receiver - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-F01-NN 952001820 NPNS50-PR-2-F01-PP 952001170 PNP
emitter - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-G00-XG 952001210
receiver - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-F01-NN 952001550 NPNS50-PA-5-F01-PP 952001160 PNP
emitter - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-G00-XG 952001200
receiver - radial optics - M12 connector S50-PR-5-F01-NN 952001760 NPNS50-PR-5-F01-PP 952001180 PNP
emitter - radial optics - M12 connector S50-PR-5-G00-XG 952001220
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 Emitter off with Test+ on Vdc and Test- on 0 V5 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 30 mradial optics 0 ... 25 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption:
emitter ≤ 35 mAreceiver ≤ 30 mA
Light emission: infrared LED 880 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx. 500 mm at 15 mradial optics approx. 470 mm at 10 m
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED green POWER ON LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 2 ms Switching frequency: 250 Hz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCAuxiliary functions: Test + and Test -Connection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material: PBTLens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
S50
-PA
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-PA
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-PR
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-PA
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-F
01-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-G
00-X
G
S50
-PR
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-5-F
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-5-G
00-X
G
6 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
7 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
receiver outputs
3
SELECTION TABLE
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
S50-PA/PR 30 m
II3D
0 15 30 (m)
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
axial
radial 20
30
25
Detection areaExcess gain
axial
axial
radial
radial
25
Longer operating distances can beobtained utilising separate emitterand receiver units. The infraredemission is modulated to avoidinterference with other lightsources and the emitter is fittedwith test inputs for remote systeminterrogation.
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
D E
THROUGH BEAM WITH INFRARED EMISSION
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
EMITTER
RECEIVER
S50-MA/MR-5S50-MA/MR-2
B B
RADIAL OPTICS
4
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs (receiver);power on LED (emitter)
Adjustment tr immer(receiver)
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
A
B
C
D
E
CONNECTIONS
C C
CC
B
A
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
EMITTER
RECEIVER
G/F
mm
5
TECHNICAL DATA
TECHNICAL NOTES
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 30 mradial optics 0 ... 25 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption:
emitter ≤ 35 mAreceiver ≤ 30 mA
Light emission: infrared LED 880 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx. 500 mm at 15 mradial optics approx. 470 mm at 10 m
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED green POWER ON LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 2 ms Switching frequency: 250 Hz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCAuxiliary functions: Test + and Test -Connection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material: nickel plated brassLens material: PMMAWeight:
110 g max. 60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
S50
-MA
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-MR
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-MA
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-F
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-G
00-X
G
S50
-MR
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-5-F
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-5-G
00-X
G
1
3
4
5
7
6
2
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 Emitter off with Test+ on Vdc and Test- on 0 V5 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
6 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
7 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
receiver outputs
SELECTION TABLE
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
receiver - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-F01-NN 952021700 NPNS50-MA-2-F01-PP 952021250 PNP
emitter - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-G00-XG 952021060
receiver - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MR-2-F01-NN 952021640 NPNS50-MR-2-F01-PP 952021170 PNP
emitter - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MR-2-G00-XG 952021180
receiver - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-F01-NN 952021700 NPNS50-MA-5-F01-PP 952021250 PNP
emitter - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-G00-XG 952021260
receiver - radial optics - M12 connector S50-MR-5-F01-NN 952021800 NPNS50-MR-5-F01-PP 952021370 PNP
emitter - radial optics - M12 connector S50-MR-5-G00-XG 952021380
S50-MA/MR 30 m
II3D
0 15 30 (m)
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
axial
radial 20
30
25
Detection areaExcess gain
axial
axial
radial
radial
25
NOT USED
TEST +
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andpower on LEDs
Adjustment tr immer(receiver)
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
B
B
F
F
D
C C
CC
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.Decrease sensitivity to increase resolution.
EMITTER
RECEIVER
B
EMITTER
S50-PL/PH-5S50-PL/PH-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
RECEIVER
RADIAL OPTICS
6
A
The high operating distance typicalof emitter and receiver pairs isnotably increased thanks to theuse of visible red laser emission.The laser beam can be easilyaligned and offers excellentdetection resolution of even smallobjects. The class 1 laser emissionguarantees maximum safety for theoperators in all applications.
LASER THROUGH BEAM WITH RED EMISSIONL-G/F
mm
7
S50-PL/PH 60 m
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 60 mradial optics 0 ... 50 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption:
emitter ≤ 35 mAreceiver ≤ 30 mA
Light emission:red Laser 650 nmclass 1 EN 60825-1class II CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
Resolution:approx. 2.5 mm at 5 mapprox. 5 mm at 10 mapprox. 10 mm over 20 m
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green POWER ON LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 333 µs Switching frequency: 1.5 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCAuxiliary functions: Test +Connection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material: PBTLens material: PMMA / glassWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max.
Operating temperature: -10 ... +50°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2,
EN 60825-1, CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
S50
-PL
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-PL
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-PL
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-PL
-5-G
00-X
G
S50
-PL
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-PL
-5-F
01-P
P
S50
-PH
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-PH
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-PH
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-PH
-5-G
00-X
G
S50
-PH
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-PH
-5-F
01-P
P
TECHNICAL NOTES1 Limit values2 Average life of 50.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 Emitter off with Test+ connected to +Vcc
Emitter on with Test+ not connected or connected to 0V
5 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
SELECTION TABLEemitter - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PL-2-G00-XG 952001420
receiver - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PL-2-F01-NN 952001890 NPNS50-PL-2-F01-PP 952001400 PNP
emitter - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PH-2-G00-XG 952002060
receiver - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PH-2-F01-NN 952002030 NPNS50-PH-2-F01-PP 952002020 PNP
emitter - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PL-5-G00-XG 952001430
receiver - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PL-5-F01-NN 952001860 NPNS50-PL-5-F01-PP 952001410 PNP
emitter - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PH-5-G00-XG 952002070
receiver - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PH-5-F01-NN 952002050 NPNS50-PH-5-F01-PP 952002040 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
6 Compatible with quick connection systems 7 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on receiver outputs
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
0 15 30 45 60 (m)
Operating distance
60
50
Resolution - axialDetection area - axial
Detection area - radial Resolution - radial
radial
axial
The use of the MICRO-18 fixing bracket(cod. 95ACC1380) is recommended for thecorrect optic axis alignment of the laseremission.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andpower on LEDs
Adjustment tr immer(receiver)
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
B
The high operating distance typicalof emitter and receiver pairs isnotably increased thanks to the useof visible red laser emission. Thelaser beam can be easily alignedand offers excellent detectionresolution of even small objects.The class 1 laser emissionguarantees maximum safety for theoperators in all applications.
S50-ML/MH-5S50-ML/MH-2EMITTER
8
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distanceDecrease sensitivity to increase resolution.
A
NOT USED
TEST +
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
RECEIVER
LASER THROUGH BEAM WITH RED EMISSIONL-G/F
RADIAL OPTICS
D E
EMITTER
RECEIVER
B B
C C
CC
mm
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 60 mradial optics 0 ... 50 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption:
emitter ≤ 35 mAreceiver ≤ 30 mA
Light emission:red Laser 650 nmclass 1 EN 60825-1class II CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
Resolution: approx. 2.5 mm at 5 mapprox. 5 mm at 10 mapprox. 10 mm over 20 m
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green POWER ON LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 333 µs Switching frequency: 1.5 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCAuxiliary functions: Test +Connection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material: nickel plated brassLens material: PMMA / glassWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max.
Operating temperature: -10 ... +50°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2,
EN 60825-1, CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
TECHNICAL NOTES1 Limit values2 Average life of 50.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 Emitter off with Test+ connected to +Vcc
Emitter on with Test+ not connected or connected to 0V
6 Compatible with quick connection systems 7 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on receiver outputs
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
0 15 30 45 60 (m)
Operating distance
60
50
Resolution - axialDetection area - axial
Detection area - radial Resolution - radial
radial
axial
9
S50-ML/MH 60 m
TECHNICAL DATA
S50
-ML
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-ML
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-ML
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-ML
-5-G
00-X
G
S50
-ML
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-ML
-5-F
01-P
P
S50
-MH
-2-G
00-X
G
S50
-MH
-2-F
01-N
N
S50
-MH
-2-F
01-P
P
S50
-MH
-5-G
00-X
G
S50
-MH
-5-F
01-N
N
S50
-MH
-5-F
01-P
P
SELECTION TABLEemitter - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-ML-2-G00-XG 952021430
receiver - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-ML-2-F01-NN 952021840 NPNS50-ML-2-F01-PP 952021420 PNP
emitter - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MH-2-G00-XG 952022060
receiver - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MH-2-F01-NN 952022030 NPNS50-MH-2-F01-PP 952022020 PNP
emitter - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-ML-5-G00-XG 952021470
receiver - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-ML-5-F01-NN 952021870 NPNS50-ML-5-F01-PP 952021460 PNP
emitter - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MH-5-G00-XG 952022070
receiver - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MH-5-F01-NN 952022050 NPNS50-MH-5-F01-PP 952022040 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
The use of the MICRO-18 fixing bracket(cod. 95ACC1380) is recommended for thecorrect optic axis alignment of the laseremission.
5 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
RETROREFLEX WITH INFRARED EMISSION
With retroreflex sensors the objectis detected when it interrupts thelight beam generated between thesensor and its associatedprismatic reflector. This retroreflexsystem, created between thesensor and the reflector, offers theadvantage of electricallyconnecting one single unit insteadof two, as in the emitter-receiversystem.
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status LED
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
D E
F
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
C
10
C
A
A
A
mm
5 (m)
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
11
S50-PA 5 mS50-MA
TECHNICAL NOTES1 Limit values2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems 5 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on the outputs
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 0.1 ... 5 m Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: infrared LED 880 nmSpot dimension: approx. 100 mm at 2 mIndicators: yellow OUTPUT LED Output type:
PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max. 60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
5
2
S50
-PA
-2-A
00-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-A
00-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-A
00-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-A
00-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-A
00-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-A
00-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-A
00-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-A
00-P
P
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-A00-NN 952002090 NPNS50-PA-2-A00-PP 952002080 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-A00-NN 952022090 NPNS50-MA-2-A00-PP 952022080 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-A00-NN 952002110 NPNS50-PA-5-A00-PP 952002100 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-A00-NN 952022110 NPNS50-MA-5-A00-PP 952022100 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
Detection areaExcess gain
R2R5
R2 R5
10.1 2 3 4
Operating distance
axial on R5 5
axial on R2 4
POLARISED RETROREFLEX WITH RED EMISSION
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Reflectors (A.01), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
B
B
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
RADIAL OPTICS
12
D E
F B F
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
BC
C C
CB
B
A
A
With retroreflex sensors the objectis detected when it interrupts thelight beam generated between thesensor and its associatedprismatic reflector. High-polarisation optic filters also allowreliable detection of very reflectiveobjects, such as mirrored surfacesthat, differently from the prismaticreflector, reflect the light beamwithout rotating the polarisationplane.
B
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES1 Limit values2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
5 Compatible with quick connection systems 6 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on the outputs
10.1 2 3 4 5 (m)
axial on R2 3.5
4.5
4
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0.1 ... 4.5 m radial optics 0.1 ... 3 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: red LED 660 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx. 45 mm at 1 mradial optics approx. 60 mm at 2 m
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max. 60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
5
6
2
S50
-PA
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-B
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-5-B
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-B
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-5-B
01-P
P
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-PA-2-B01-NN 952001610 NPNS50-PA-2-B01-PP 952001010 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-B01-NN 952021500 NPNS50-MA-2-B01-PP 952021000 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-B01-NN 952001500 NPNS50-PA-5-B01-PP 952001020 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-B01-NN 952021660 NPNS50-MA-5-B01-PP 952021200 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-B01-NN 952001780 NPNS50-PR-2-B01-PP 952001030 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MR-2-B01-NN 952021600 NPNS50-MR-2-B01-PP 952021140 PNP
plastic - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PR-5-B01-NN 952001720 NPNS50-PR-5-B01-PP 952001040 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MR-5-B01-NN 952021760 NPNS50-MR-5-B01-PP 952021340 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
radial on R5
radial on R2
2.5
2
3
2.5
axial on R5 4
Detection area - axialExcess gain - axial
Excess gain - radial Detection area - radial
13
R2
R2
High efficiency reflectors can be usedto obtain larger operating distances.Refer to Reflectors (A.01) of theGeneral Catalogue.
R5
R2
R5
R5
R5 R2
3 mS50-PA/PR S50-MA/MR 4.5 m
D E
F B F
BC
C C
CB
B
LASER RETROREFLEX WITH RED EMISSION
The visible red laser emissionincreases the operating distanceand resolution of the polarisedretroreflex sensor. Specific R7 orR8 reflectors with 0.8 mm micro-prisms are available for high-resolution detection of smallobjects. The class 1 laser emissionguarantees maximum safety for theoperators in all applications.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Reflectors (A.01), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
PLASTIC HOUSING
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
B
B
14
METAL HOUSING
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distanceDecrease sensitivity to increase resolution.
A
A
L-B
RADIAL OPTICS
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES1 Limit values2 Average life of 50.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PL-2-B01-NN 952001870 NPNS50-PL-2-B01-PP 952001360 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PH-2-B01-NN 952001950 NPNS50-PH-2-B01-PP 952001940 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-ML-2-B01-NN 952021820 NPNS50-ML-2-B01-PP 952021400 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MH-2-B01-NN 952021950 NPNS50-MH-2-B01-PP 952021940 PNP
plastic -axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PL-5-B01-NN 952001840 NPNS50-PL-5-B01-PP 952001370 PNP
plastic -radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PH-5-B01-NN 952001970 NPNS50-PH-5-B01-PP 952001960 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-ML-5-B01-NN 952021850 NPNS50-ML-5-B01-PP 952021440 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MH-5-B01-NN 952021970 NPNS50-MH-5-B01-PP 952021960 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0.1 ... 16 mradial optics 0.1 ... 9 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission:
red Laser 650 nmclass 1 EN 60825-1class II CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
Resolution:2 mm max. at 3 m (on R7)5 mm max. over 7 m (on R2)
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 333 µs Switching frequency: 1.5 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMA / glassWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -10 ... +50°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2,
EN 60825-1, CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
1
3
4
6
5
2
S50
-PL
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-PL
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-PH
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-PH
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-PL
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-PL
-5-B
01-P
P
S50
-PH
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-PH
-5-B
01-P
P
S50
-ML
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-ML
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-MH
-2-B
01-N
N
S50
-MH
-2-B
01-P
P
S50
-ML
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-ML
-5-B
01-P
P
S50
-MH
-5-B
01-N
N
S50
-MH
-5-B
01-P
P
5 Compatible with quick connection systems 6 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on the outputs
15
High efficiency reflectors can be usedto obtain larger operating distances.Refer to Reflectors (A.01) of theGeneral Catalogue.
S50-PH/PL S50-MH/ML 16 m
8 12 16 (m)
axial on R7 11
Operating distance
radial on R2
radial on R7
9
axial on R2 16
Resolution on R7 reflector - axialDetection area - axial
Detection area - radial Resolution on R7 reflector - radial
R7R2
R7 R2
The use of the MICRO-18 fixing bracket(cod. 95ACC1380) is recommended for thecorrect optic axis alignment of the laseremission.
6
RETROREFLEX FOR TRANSPARENTS WITH RED EMISSION
With high sensitivity and reducedhysteresis this retroreflex sensorallows the detection of even asmall variation of the lightemission received by the sensor,typically created by the presenceof transparent objects such asglass or PET containers or plasticfilm sheets for packaging. Thepresence of polarising filtersavoids false switching on shinysurfaces.
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Reflectors (A.01), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status LED
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
D E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
B
B
B
B
BB
F
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
C
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
16
C C
C
A
A
RADIAL OPTICS
T
mm
1 Limit values2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-T01-NN 952001690 NPNS50-PA-2-T01-PP 952001260 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-T01-NN 952021570 NPNS50-MA-2-T01-PP 952021090 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-T01-NN 952001580 NPNS50-PA-5-T01-PP 952001270 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-MA-5-T01-NN 952021730 NPNS50-MA-5-T01-PP 952021290 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-T01-NN 952001830 NPNS50-PR-2-T01-PP 952001280 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MR-2-T01-NN 952021650 NPNS50-MR-2-T01-PP 952021190 PNP
plastic - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PR-5-T01-NN 952001770 NPNS50-PR-5-T01-PP 952001290 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MR-5-T01-NN 952021810 NPNS50-MR-5-T01-PP 952021390 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0.1 ... 1.7 mradial optics 0.1 ... 1.7 m
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: red LED 660 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx. 45 mm at 1 mradial optics approx. 60 mm at 1 m
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators: yellow OUTPUT LED Output type:
PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
5
6
2
S50
-PA
-2-T
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-T
01-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-T
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-T
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-2-T
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-2-T
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-5-T
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-5-T
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-T
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-T
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-T
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-T
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-2-T
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-2-T
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-5-T
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-5-T
01-P
P
5 Compatible with quick connection systems 6 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on the outputs
0.50.1 1 1.5 2 (m)
axial on R2 1
1.7
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
radial on R5
radial on R2 1
axial on R5
1.4
TECHNICAL NOTES
17
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
Detection areaExcess gain
1.4 1.7
1.3
1.3
R2
R5 R2R5
S50-PA/PR 1.7 mS50-MA/MR
High efficiency reflectors can be usedto obtain larger operating distances.Refer to Reflectors (A.01) of theGeneral Catalogue
SHORT DIFFUSE PROXIMITY WITH INFRARED EMISSION
This diffuse proximity sensorrepresents a reliable, simple andcost-effective solution for thedirect detection of any objectinside the fixed operating distance.Its particularly compactdimensions permit the installationin very small spaces.
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status LED
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
D E
FF
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
C
C
C
18
C
A
A
RADIAL OPTICS
C
mm
Detection area - axialExcess gain - axial
Excess gain - radial
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-PA-2-C10-NN 952001630 NPNS50-PA-2-C10-PP 952001240 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-MA-2-C10-NN 952021520 NPNS50-MA-2-C10-PP 952021020 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PA-5-C10-NN 952001520 NPNS50-PA-5-C10-PP 952001250 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-MA-5-C10-NN 952021680 NPNS50-MA-5-C10-PP 952021220 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-C10-NN 952001800 NPNS50-PR-2-C10-PP 952001490 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MR-2-C10-NN 952021620 NPNS50-MR-2-C10-PP 952021490 PNP
plastic - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PR-5-C10-NN 952001740 NPNS50-PR-5-C10-PP 952001480 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MR-5-C10-NN 952021780 NPNS50-MR-5-C10-PP 952021480 PNP
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 10 cmradial optics 0 ... 8 cm
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: infrared LED 880 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx. 80 mm at 10 cmradial optics approx. 55 mm at 10 cm
Indicators: yellow OUTPUT LED Output type:
PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
5
4
2
S50
-PA
-2-C
10-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-C
10-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-C
10-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-C
10-P
P
S50
-PR
-2-C
10-N
N
S50
-PR
-2-C
10-P
P
S50
-PR
-5-C
10-N
N
S50
-PR
-5-C
10-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-C
10-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-C
10-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-C
10-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-C
10-P
P
S50
-MR
-2-C
10-N
N
S50
-MR
-2-C
10-P
P
S50
-MR
-5-C
10-N
N
S50
-MR
-5-C
10-P
P
0 2.5 5 7.5 10 12.5 (cm)
axial
radial
10
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
TECHNICAL NOTES
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
8
19
White 90%
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
Detection area - radial
White 90%
S50-PA/PR 10 cmS50-MA/MR
mm
cm
mm
cm
cm
cm
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
11
9
DIFFUSE PROXIMITY WITH INFRARED EMISSION
This version of diffuse proximitysensor has a detection distancethat can be set using thesensitivity adjustment trimmer. Thegreen stability LED indicateswhether the received signal isabove to the minimum signal forstable output switching.
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
B
B
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
20
D E
F B
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
BC
C
A
A
C
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 0 ... 40 cmPower supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: infrared LED 880 nmSpot dimension: approx. 100 mm at 300 cmSetting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: light on NO / dark on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
6
5
2
S50
-PA
-2-C
21-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-C
21-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-C
21-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-C
21-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-C
21-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-C
21-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-C
21-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-C
21-P
P
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-C21-NN 952002170 NPNS50-PA-2-C21-PP 952002160 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-C21-NN 952022130 NPNS50-MA-2-C21-PP 952022120 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-C21-NN 952002190 NPNS50-PA-5-C21-PP 952002180 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-C21-NN 952022150 NPNS50-MA-5-C21-PP 952022140 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
5 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
6 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
TECHNICAL NOTES
21
Recommended operating distanceMaximum operating distance
S50-PA 40 cmS50-MA
0 10 20 30 40 (cm)
40
Detection areaExcess gain
35
White 90%Grey 18% White 90%
Grey 18%
LONG DIFFUSE PROXIMITY WITH INFRARED EMISSION
This version of diffuse proximitysensor offers the maximumoperating distance for the directdetection of objects. The detectiondistance can be set using thesensitivity adjustment trimmer. Thegreen stability LED indicateswhether the received signal isabove to the minimum signal forstable output switching.
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
B
B
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
22
D E
F B F
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
BC C
CC
B
B
A
A
RADIAL OPTICS
C
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 70 cmradial optics 0 ... 40 cm
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: infrared LED 880 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx.200 mm at 60 cmradial optics approx.35 mm at 40 cm
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
6
5
2
S50
-PA
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-C
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-PR
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-PR
-5-C
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-C
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-MR
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-MR
-5-C
01-P
P
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-C01-NN 952001620 NPNS50-PA-2-C01-PP 952001050 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-C01-NN 952021510 NPNS50-MA-2-C01-PP 952021010 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-C01-NN 952001510 NPNS50-PA-5-C01-PP 952001060 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-C01-NN 952021670 NPNS50-MA-5-C01-PP 952021210 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-C01-NN 952001790 NPNS50-PR-2-C01-PP 952001070 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MR-2-C01-NN 952021610 NPNS50-MR-2-C01-PP 952021150 PNP
plastic - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PR-5-C01-NN 952001730 NPNS50-PR-5-C01-PP 952001080 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MR-5-C01-NN 952021770 NPNS50-MR-5-C01-PP 952021350 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
5 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
6 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
TECHNICAL NOTES
0 15 30 45 60 (cm)
axial
radial 35
60 70
40
23
Detection area - axialExcess gain - axial
Excess gain - radial
Grey 18%
White 90%
White 90%
White 90%
Grey 18%
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
Detection area - radial
Recommended operating distanceMaximum operating distance
S50-PA/PR 70 cmS50-MA/MR
mm
cm
mm
cm
cm
cm
FIXED FOCUS PROXIMITY WITH RED EMISSION
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
The fixed focus proximity sensoroffers a simple fixed backgroundsuppression distance beyondwhich no object is detected. Thefixed triangulation of the opticsgreatly reduces the detectiondistance of reflective objects. Thevisible red emission facilitatessensor installation.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status LED
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
24
D E
FF
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
CC
C C
A
A
RADIAL OPTICS
D
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-D00-NN 952001640 NPNS50-PA-2-D00-PP 952001090 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-D00-NN 952021530 NPNS50-MA-2-D00-PP 952021030 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-D00-NN 952001530 NPNS50-PA-5-D00-PP 952001100 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-D00-NN 952021690 NPNS50-MA-5-D00-PP 952021230 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PR-2-D00-NN 952001810 NPNS50-PR-2-D00-PP 952001110 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cableS50-MR-2-D00-NN 952021630 NPNS50-MR-2-D00-PP 952021160 PNP
plastic - radial optics - M12 connector S50-PR-5-D00-NN 952001750 NPNS50-PR-5-D00-PP 952001120 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connector S50-MR-5-D00-NN 952021790 NPNS50-MR-5-D00-PP 952021360 PNP
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0.5 ... 10 cmradial optics 0 ... 8 cm
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: red LED 630 nmSpot dimension:
axial optics approx. 20 mm at 10 cmradial optics approx. 25 mm at 8 cm
Indicators: yellow OUTPUT LED Output type:
PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
5
4
2
S50
-PA
-2-D
00-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-D
00-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-D
00-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-D
00-P
P
S50
-PR
-2-D
00-N
N
S50
-PR
-2-D
00-P
P
S50
-PR
-5-D
00-N
N
S50
-PR
-5-D
00-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-D
00-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-D
00-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-D
00-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-D
00-P
P
S50
-MR
-2-D
00-N
N
S50
-MR
-2-D
00-P
P
S50
-MR
-5-D
00-N
N
S50
-MR
-5-D
00-P
P
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
0 2.5 5 7.5 10 (cm)
Operating distance
axial
radial
10
8
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
TECHNICAL NOTES
Detection area - axialExcess gain - axial
Excess gain - radial
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
White 90%White 90%
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
Detection - radial
S50-PA/PR 10 cmS50-MA/MR
mm
cm
mm
cm
cm
cm
25
D E
B F
BC C
CC
B
B
LASER PROXIMITY WITH RED EMISSION
The visible red laser emissionallows the accurate detection ofvery small objects. The sensorsoperate as a proximity device up to35 cm and can be used as acontrast sensor for high contrastmark detection. The class 1 laseremission guarantees maximumsafety for the operators in allapplications.
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
BB
C
D
E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
B
26
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
A
A
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
L-C
RADIAL OPTICS
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES1 Limit values2 Average life of 50.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PL-2-C01-NN 952001880 NPNS50-PL-2-C01-PP 952001380 PNP
plastic - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-PH-2-C01-NN 952001990 NPNS50-PH-2-C01-PP 952001980 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-ML-2-C01-NN 952021830 NPNS50-ML-2-C01-PP 952021410 PNP
metal - radial optics - 2 m cable S50-MH-2-C01-NN 952021990 NPNS50-MH-2-C01-PP 952021980 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PL-5-C01-NN 952001850 NPNS50-PL-5-C01-PP 952001390 PNP
plastic - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-PH-5-C01-NN 952002010 NPNS50-PH-5-C01-PP 952002000 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-ML-5-C01-NN 952021860 NPNS50-ML-5-C01-PP 952021450 PNP
metal - radial optics - M12 connectorS50-MH-5-C01-NN 952022010 NPNS50-MH-5-C01-PP 952022000 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:axial optics 0 ... 35 cmradial optics 0 ... 25 cm
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission:
red Laser 650 nmclass 1 EN 60825-1class II CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
Resolution: approx. 0.3 mm at 5 cmapprox. 0.3 mm at 10 cmapprox. 0.5 mm at 20 cmapprox. 2 mm at 30 cm
Setting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 333 µs Switching frequency: 1.5 kHz Operating mode: light on NO / dark on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMA / glassWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -10 ... +50°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2,
EN 60825-1, CDRH21 CFR 1040.10
1
3
4
6
5
2
S50
-PL
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-PL
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-PH
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-PH
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-PL
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-PL
-5-C
01-P
P
S50
-PH
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-PH
-5-C
01-P
P
S50
-ML
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-ML
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-MH
-2-C
01-N
N
S50
-MH
-2-C
01-P
P
S50
-ML
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-ML
-5-C
01-P
P
S50
-MH
-5-C
01-N
N
S50
-MH
-5-C
01-P
P
5 Compatible with quick connection systems 6 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on the outputs
0 10 20 40 (cm)
Operating distance
25
35
S50-PH/PL S50-MH/ML 35 cm
27
Resolution - axialDetection area - axial
Detection area - radial Resolution - radial
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
White 90%
radial
axial
The use of the MICRO-18 fixing bracket(cod. 95ACC1380) is recommended for thecorrect optic axis alignment of the laseremission.
AXIAL BACKGROUND SUPPRESSION WITH RED EMISSION
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
OUTPUT status andREADY / ERROR LEDs
Teach-in push-button
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Teach-in button for setting.EASYtouch™ provides two setting modes: standard or fine,both obtained by pressing the push-button only once. Pleaserefer to instructions manual for operating details.
AB
B
CONNECTIONS
Background suppression proximityallows to precisely adjust thedistance over which the object isnot detected, with the minimumdifference between reflectiveobjects. The EASYtouchTM settingprocedure fixes automatically thebest detection conditions, simplypressing once the teach-in push-button, in presence of thereference to detect.
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
C
C
D E
F
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
B
B
28
A
M
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 5 ... 10 cmPower supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 30 mALight emission: red LED 630 nmSpot dimension: approx. 8 mm at 10 cmSetting: teach-in push-button Setting procedure: teach-in EASYtouchTM
Indicators:yellow OUTPUT LED green / red READY / ERROR LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 1 ms Switching frequency: 500 Hz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
5
4
2
S50
-PA
-2-M
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-M
03-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-M
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-M
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-M
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-M
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-M
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-M
03-P
P
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-M03-NN 952001670 NPNS50-PA-2-M03-PP 952001230 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-M03-NN 952021550 NPNS50-MA-2-M03-PP 952021070 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-M03-NN 952001560 NPNS50-PA-5-M03-PP 952001000 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-M03-NN 952021710 NPNS50-MA-5-M03-PP 952021270 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
0 2 4 6 8
Operating distance
10
10 (cm)
Detection difference withfine acquisition
Detection difference with EASYtouch™ acquisition
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
White 90%
% d
iffere
nce
obje
ct d
ista
nce
Setting distance on white 90% background Setting distance on white 90% background
% d
iffere
nce
obje
ct d
ista
nce
S50-PA S50-MA 10 cm
29
RADIAL BACKGROUND SUPPRESSION WITH RED EMISSION
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Teach-in button for setting.EASYtouch™ provides two setting modes: standard or fine,both obtained by pressing the push-button only once. Pleaserefer to instructions manual for operating details.
D
B
CF
B
C
E
CONNECTIONS
Background suppression proximityallows to precisely adjust thedistance over which the object isnot detected, with the minimumdifference between reflectiveobjects. The EASYtouchTM settingprocedure fixes automatically thebest detection conditions, simplypressing once the teach-in push-button, in presence of the referenceto detect.
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
30
OUTPUT status andREADY / ERROR LEDs
Teach-in push-button
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
AB
BA
M
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 5 ... 10 cmPower supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 30 mALight emission: red LED 630 nmSpot dimension: approx. 10 mm at 10 cmSetting: teach-in push-button Setting procedure: teach-in EASYtouchTM
Indicators:yellow OUTPUT LED green / red READY / ERROR LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 1 ms Switching frequency: 500 Hz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBT / PVCnickel plated brass
Lens material: glassWeight:
90 g max. 40 g max. 125 g max.75 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
5
2
S50
-PS
-2-M
03-N
N
S50
-PS
-2-M
03-P
P
S50
-PS
-5-M
03-N
N
S50
-PS
-5-M
03-P
P
S50
-MS
-2-M
03-N
N
S50
-MS
-2-M
03-P
P
S50
-MS
-5-M
03-N
N
S50
-MS
-5-M
03-P
P
SELECTION TABLEplastic - 2 m cable S50-PS-2-M03-NN 952001900 NPNS50-PS-2-M03-PP 952001910 PNP
metal - 2 m cable S50-MS-2-M03-NN 952021900 NPNS50-MS-2-M03-PP 952021910 PNP
plastic - M12 connectorS50-PS-5-M03-NN 952001920 NPNS50-PS-5-M03-PP 952001930 PNP
metal - M12 connectorS50-MS-5-M03-NN 952021920 NPNS50-MS-5-M03-PP 952021930 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
0 2 4 6 8
Operating distance
10
10 (cm)
Detection difference withfine acquisition
Detection difference with EASYtouch™ acquisition
Grey 18%
White 90%
Grey 18%
White 90%
% d
iffere
nce
obje
ct d
ista
nce
Setting distance on white 90% background Setting distance on white 90% background
% d
iffere
nce
obje
ct d
ista
nce
S50-PS 10 cmS50-MS
31
FORE-BACKGROUND SUPPRESSION WITH RED EMISSION
The fore-background suppressionproximity allows to preciselyadjust the minimum and maximumdetec t ion d is tance . TheEASYtouchTM setting procedurefixes automatically the bestdetection conditions, simplypressing once the teach-in push-button, in presence of thereference to detect.
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
Teach-in button for setting.EASYtouch™ provides two setting modes: standard or fine,both obtained by pressing the push-button only once. Pleaserefer to instructions manual for operating details.
CONNECTIONS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
32
C
CB
D E
F
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
B
OUTPUT status andREADY / ERROR LEDs
Teach-in push-button
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
AB
BA
N
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-N03-NN 952001680 NPNS50-PA-2-N03-PP 952001440 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-N03-NN 952021560 NPNS50-MA-2-N03-PP 952021080 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PA-5-N03-NN 952001570 NPNS50-PA-5-N03-PP 952001450 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-MA-5-N03-NN 952021720 NPNS50-MA-5-N03-PP 952021280 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 4 ... 10 cmPower supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 30 mALight emission: red LED 630 nmSpot dimension: approx. 8 mm at 10 cmSetting: teach-in push-button Setting procedure: teach-in EASYtouchTM
Indicators:yellow OUTPUT LED green / red READY / ERROR LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 2 ms Switching frequency: 250 Hz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
5
4
2
S50
-PA
-2-N
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-N
03-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-N
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-N
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-N
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-N
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-N
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-N
03-P
P
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
0 2 4 6 8 10 (cm)
Operating distance
10
Detection hysteresis with EASYtouch™ acquisition
Background suppression area
Detection area
Foreground suppression area
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 (cm)
Distance
Dis
tance
10
6
4
2
0
8
(cm)
12
Note: in the fine acquisition mode, the foreground suppression distanceis nearer to the point where the object has been acquired
S50-PA S50-MA 10 cm
33
FIBRE-OPTIC AMPLIFIER WITH RED EMISSION
The amplifier is built to accept anystandard 2.2 mm Ø fibre-opticwhich can be for either diffused orthrough beam operation. A lockingring when tightened holds thefibres firmly in position. Thesensitivity is adjusted by an IP67rated trimmer. The proximity orthrough beam fibres are mainlyused in applications where space isof a premium and for detection ofsmall objects. Special fibres arealso available for high temperatureand high wear applications. Forfurther information on theextensive range of fibre-opticaccessories please see the OFdatasheet.
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Fibre-optics (A.02), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue.
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status andSTABILITY LEDs
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
Fibre fixing nut
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
D
C
E
F
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate in aclockwise direction to increase the operating distance.
B
B
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
PLASTIC HOUSING
34
C
B
METAL HOUSING
H
H
B
A
A
E
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-E01-NN 952001650 NPNS50-PA-2-E01-PP 952001130 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-MA-2-E01-NN 952021880 NPNS50-MA-2-E01-PP 952021040 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PA-5-E01-NN 952001540 NPNS50-PA-5-E01-PP 952001140 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-MA-5-E01-NN 952021890 NPNS50-MA-5-E01-PP 952021240 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance:proximity 3 cm (OF-42-ST-20 standard fibres) through beam 10 cm (OF-43-ST-20 standard fibres)
Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 35 mALight emission: red LED 660 nmSetting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators:
yellow OUTPUT LED green STABILITY
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 0.5 ms Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Fibre fixing nut material: ABSWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
6
5
2
S50
-PA
-2-E
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-E
01-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-E
01-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-E
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-E
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-E
01-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-E
01-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-E
01-P
P2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° single-turn trimmer 4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
5 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
6 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
0 2.5 5 7.5 10 (cm)
Operating distance with standard fibres
Proximty
Through beam
3
10
* standard fibre-optics
Standard fibre-optics:OF-42-ST-20 proximityOF-43-ST-20 through beam
High efficiency fibre-optics or accessorylenses can be used to obtain largeroperating distances. Refer to Fibre-optics (A.02) of the GeneralCatalogue.
Detection area - proximity *Excess gain - proximity *
Excess gain - through beam * Detection area - through beam *
Grey 18%White 90%
White 90%
Grey 18%
S50-PA S50-MA 3/10 cm
35
CONTRAST SENSOR WITH WHITE EMISSION
The white light LED emission isdesigned for the detection of alarge number of coloured or grey-scale contrasts, in order to detectprint registration marks or similar.The EASYtouch TM se t t ingprocedures automatically selectsthe best detection conditions,simply by pressing the teach-inpush-button once, in the presenceof a reference mark. By pressingthe teach-in push-button andholding it down until the greenlight on the rear of the sensorflashes, in the presence of thereference mark and then pressingthe button again in the presence ofthe contrast you wish to ignore, ahigher level of accuracy isobtained.
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Fibre-optics (A.02), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue.
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS OUTPUT status andREADY / ERROR LEDs
Teach-in push-button
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Teach-in button for setting.EASYtouch™ provides two setting modes: standard or fine,both obtained by pressing the push-button only once. Pleaserefer to instructions manual for operating details.
CONNECTIONS
A
A
B
B
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
36
C
B
B
C
D E
F
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
W
mm
Sensitivity / operating distance
TECHNICAL DATA
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
SELECTION TABLE
Operating distance: 10 mmDepth of field (max.): ± 2 mmPower supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 25 mALight emission: white LED 400 - 700 nmSpot dimension: approx. 4.5 mm at 10 mmMinimum detectable object: 0.5 mmSetting: teach-in push-button Setting procedure: teach-in EASYtouchTM
Indicators:yellow OUTPUT LED green / red READY / ERROR LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 100 µs Switching frequency: 5 kHz Operating mode:
dark with EASYtouchTM
automatic dark / light with fine acq.Connection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
S50
-PA
-2-W
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-W
03-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-W
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-W
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-W
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-W
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-W
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-W
03-P
P plastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-W03-NN 952001710 NPNS50-PA-2-W03-PP 952001320 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-W03-NN 952021590 NPNS50-MA-2-W03-PP 952021110 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-W03-NN 952001600 NPNS50-PA-5-W03-PP 952001330 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-W03-NN 952021750 NPNS50-MA-5-W03-PP 952021310 PNP
TECHNICAL NOTES
1
3
5
4
2
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
Rela
tive s
ensi
tivity
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
0 4 8 12 (mm)
Operating distance
12
S50-PA S50-MA 10 mm
37
LUMINESCENCE SENSOR WITH UV EMISSION
The UV light LED emission detectsany luminescent reference, evenon very reflective surfaces, such asceramics, metal or mirrored glass.The EASYtouch TM se t t ingprocedures fixes automatically thebest detection conditions, simplyby pressing the teach-in push-button once, with the luminescentobject present. By pressing theteach-in push-button and holding itdown until the green light on therear of the sensor flashes, with theluminescent object present andthen pressing the button again inthe presence of a luminescentreference you wish to ignore, ahigher level of accuracy isobtained.
DIMENSIONS
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Fibre-optics (A.02), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue.
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
Teach-in button for setting.EASYtouch™ provides two setting modes: standard or fine,both obtained by pressing the push-button only once. Pleaserefer to instructions manual for operating details.
CONNECTIONS
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
38
C
B
B
D E
F
C
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
OUTPUT status andREADY / ERROR LEDs
Teach-in push-button
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
A
B
B
ACCESSORIES
U
mm
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
SELECTION TABLE
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
plastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-U03-NN 952001700 NPNS50-PA-2-U03-PP 952001300 PNP
metal - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-MA-2-U03-NN 952021580 NPNS50-MA-2-U03-PP 952021100 PNP
plastic - axial optics - M12 connector S50-PA-5-U03-NN 952001590 NPNS50-PA-5-U03-PP 952001310 PNP
metal - axial optics - M12 connector S50-MA-5-U03-NN 952021740 NPNS50-MA-5-U03-PP 952021300 PNP
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 8 ... 20 mmPower supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 25 mALight emission: UV LED 370 nmSpot dimension: approx. 3 mm at 20 mmMinimum detectable object: 0.5 mmSetting: teach-in push-button Setting procedure: teach-in EASYtouchTM
Indicators:yellow OUTPUT LED green / red READY / ERROR LED
Output type:PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 500 µs Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode:
dark with EASYtouchTM
automatic dark / light with fine acq.Connection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
S50
-PA
-2-U
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-2-U
03-P
P
S50
-PA
-5-U
03-N
N
S50
-PA
-5-U
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-2-U
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-2-U
03-P
P
S50
-MA
-5-U
03-N
N
S50
-MA
-5-U
03-P
P
1
3
5
4
2
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
4 Compatible with quick connection systems
1 Limit values
5 A - reverse polarity protection B - overload and short-circuit protection on
the outputs
0 4 8 16 20 (mm)
Operating distance
20
Sensitivity / operating distance
Rela
tive s
ensi
tivity
S50-PA S50-MA 20 mm
39
DISTANCE SENSOR WITH RED EMISSION
This sensor gives an analogue0-10 Vdc output proportional to anobject's distance from the face ofthe sensor over a distance of100 mm. The light intensity of theyellow indicator LED at the rear ofthe sensor is proportional to theobject's distance, the red LEDturns on when the object is outsidethe measurement field.
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Connectors (A.03) and Fixing
brackets (A.04) of the General Catalogue.
CONNECTIONS
S50-XX-5S50-XX-2
OUTPUT status andfield LEDs
M12 connector output
Cable output
Fixing nuts
Fixing gasket
A
C
D
E
F
D
C
E
F
C
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS
A
A
Versions and options: refer to MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX of this catalogue.
PLASTIC HOUSING
METAL HOUSING
40
Y
mm
3 Direct proportionality (DIR) is activated when white wire is connected to +Vdc;Inverse proportionality (INV) is activated when white wire is connected to 0 V.The white wire must always be connected.
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
TECHNICAL NOTES
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 5 ... 10 cmPower supply: 18 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 30 mALight emission: red LED 630 nmSpot dimension: approx. 8 mm at 10 cmIndicators:
yellow proportional OUTPUT LED red field LED
Output type: analogue with 0 ... 10V voltageOutput resistance: 2 kΩLoad resistance: ≥ 20 kΩResponse time: 3,33 ms Switching frequency: 150 Hz Resolution: 1 mm / 200 mVOperating mode: direct / inverse proportionalityConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material:
PBTnickel plated brass
Lens material: PMMAWeight:
75 g max. 25 g max. 110 g max.60 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
6
4
3
5
2
S50
-PA
-2-Y
00-V
K
S50
-PA
-5-Y
00-V
K
S50
-MA
-2-Y
00-V
K
S50
-MA
-5-Y
00-V
K
SELECTION TABLEplastic - axial optics - 2 m cable S50-PA-2-Y00-VK 952001340
metal - axial optics - 2 m cableS50-MA-2-Y00-VK 952021120
plastic - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-PA-5-Y00-VK 952001350
metal - axial optics - M12 connectorS50-MA-5-Y00-VK 952021320
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue.
2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C
1 Limit values
4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
5 Compatible with quick connection systems 6 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on the outputs
0 2 4 6 8 10 (cm)
Operating distance
10
Measurement field ininverse proportionality
Measurement field indirect proportionality
Direct proportionality (DIR)
Tensi
on (
V)
Tensi
on (
V)
Inverse proportionality (INV)
S50-PA 10 cmS50-MA
41
MODEL DESCRIPTION ORDER N°
ST-5010 M18/14 fixing bracket 95ACC5230
ST-5011 M18 fixing bracket 95ACC5240
ST-5012 M18 fixing bracket 95ACC5250
ST-5017 M18 fixing bracket 95ACC5270
S50 EASY-IN M18/14 EASYin™ adjustable fixing support 95ACC5300
JOINT-18 M18 jointed support 95ACC5220
SWING-18 adjustable support for plastic tubular M18 sensors 895000006
MICRO-18 support with micrometric regulation for tubular M18 sensors 95ACC1380
SP-40 fixed support for tubular M18 sensors 95ACC1370
MEK-PROOF front protection G5000001
Refer also to Accessories for Sensors of the General Catalogue
TECHNOLOGY
The series is compatible with all the Datasensor accessories already developed fortubular sensors. In the General Catalogue refer to:- CS connectors - R reflectors- OF fibre-optics - ST fixing brackets New accessories dedicated to the S50 series have been developed to cover all thefixing requirements and to improve the functioning.In particular EASYin™ is an innovative fixing system that can be used only for theplastic flat version, that allows a fast and safe positioning of the sensor, facilitating theadjustment as well as the locking and unlocking.
1
2
3
4
5
Housing and fixing nuts in indeformable plasticproviding excellent resistance against hostileenvironments. Indelible laser marking
A modular product developed for the automation ofthe assembling and testing process necessary toguarantee intrinsic quality, repeatability andreliabil i ty. One-piece-flow management forimproved service
6
7
42
1
2
3
4
5
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES SELECTION TABLE AND ORDER INFORMATION
EASYtouch™ is a Datasensor patent-covered technology that allows a rapid and safe setting of micro-controlledsensors equipped with a teach-in push-button. A pressure longer than two seconds of the push-button allows a goodadjustment of the sensitivity threshold. EASYtouch™ is the easiest and fastest calibration procedure available on themarket. The instructions on how to best use EASYtouch™ are given in the product's instruction manual.
Multi-layer fine-line PCB
Chip-size components, integrated circuits in 8bumps flip-chip
Analogue digital ASIC
Power ASIC for antivalent outputs
M12 custom connector compatible with quickconnection systems. The four terminals are cone-shaped to facilitate the direct insertion in the cableconductors (4 x 0,5 mm2)
7
6
DIMENSIONS ACCESSORIES
JOINT-18
UNI-5931 M6 SCREWS
VERTICAL OPTIC AXIS HORIZONTAL OPTIC AXIS
S50 EASYin™
UNI-7687 M3 SCREWSUNI-7687 M3 SCREWS
43
44
DIMENSIONS ACCESSORIES
ST-5010 ST-5011
ST-5017ST-5012
DIMENSIONS ACCESSORIES
MICRO-18 SWING-18
SP-40 MEK PROOF
glass
45
* 2 nuts are included
PLASTIC FLAT HOUSING WITH LASER RADIAL OPTICS MODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-PH-2-B01-NN 952001950 laser retroreflex 14S50-PH-2-B01-PP 952001940 laser retroreflex 14S50-PH-2-C01-NN 952001990 laser proximity 26S50-PH-2-C01-PP 952001980 laser proximity 26S50-PH-2-F01-NN 952002030 laser receiver 6S50-PH-2-F01-PP 952002020 laser receiver 6S50-PH-2 G00-XG 952002060 laser emitter 6S50-PH-5-B01-NN 952001970 laser retroreflex 14S50-PH-5-B01-PP 952001960 laser retroreflex 14S50-PH-5-C01-NN 952002010 laser proximity 26S50-PH-5-C01-PP 952002000 laser proximity 26S50-PH-5-F01-NN 952002050 laser receiver 6S50-PH-5-F01-PP 952002040 laser receiver 6S50-PH-5-G00-XG 952002070 laser emitter 6
PLASTIC FLAT HOUSING WITH LASER AXIAL OPTICS MODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-PL-2-B01-NN 952001870 laser retroreflex 14S50-PL-2-B01-PP 952001360 laser retroreflex 14S50-PL-2-C01-NN 952001880 laser proximity 26S50-PL-2-C01-PP 952001380 laser proximity 26S50-PL-2-F01-NN 952001890 laser receiver 6S50-PL-2-F01-PP 952001400 laser receiver 6S50-PL-2 G00-XG 952001420 laser emitter 6S50-PL-5-B01-NN 952001840 laser retroreflex 14S50-PL-5-B01-PP 952001370 laser retroreflex 14S50-PL-5-C01-NN 952001850 laser proximity 26S50-PL-5-C01-PP 952001390 laser proximity 26S50-PL-5-F01-NN 952001860 laser receiver 6S50-PL-5-F01-PP 952001410 laser receiver 6S50-PL-5-G00-XG 952001430 laser emitter 6
PLASTIC FLAT HOUSING WITH RADIAL OPTICSMODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-PR-2-B01-NN 952001780 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PR-2-B01-PP 952001030 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PR-2-C01-NN 952001790 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PR-2-C01-PP 952001070 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PR-2-C10-NN 952001800 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PR-2-C10-PP 952001490 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PR-2-D00-NN 952001810 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PR-2-D00-PP 952001110 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PR-2-F01-NN 952001820 receiver 2S50-PR-2-F01-PP 952001170 receiver 2S50-PR-2-G00-XG 952001210 emitter 2S50-PR-2-T01-NN 952001830 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PR-2-T01-PP 952001280 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PR-5-B01-NN 952001720 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PR-5-B01-PP 952001040 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PR-5-C01-NN 952001730 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PR-5-C01-PP 952001080 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PR-5-C10-NN 952001740 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PR-5-C10-PP 952001480 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PR-5-D00-NN 952001750 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PR-5-D00-PP 952001120 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PR-5-F01-NN 952001760 receiver 2S50-PR-5-F01-PP 952001180 receiver 2S50-PR-5-G00-XG 952001220 emitter 2S50-PR-5-T01-NN 952001770 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PR-5-T01-PP 952001290 retroreflex for transparents 16
PLASTIC FLAT HOUSING WITH AXIAL OPTICS MODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-PA-2-A00-NN 952002090 retroreflex 10S50-PA-2-A00-PP 952002080 retroreflex 10S50-PA-2-B01-NN 952001610 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PA-2-B01-PP 952001010 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PA-2-C01-NN 952001620 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PA-2-C01-PP 952001050 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PA-2-C10-NN 952001630 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PA-2-C10-PP 952001240 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PA-2-C21-NN 952002170 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-PA-2-C21-PP 952002160 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-PA-2-D00-NN 952001640 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PA-2-D00-PP 952001090 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PA-2-E01-NN 952001650 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-PA-2-E01-PP 952001130 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-PA-2-F01-NN 952001660 receiver 2S50-PA-2-F01-PP 952001150 receiver 2S50-PA-2-G00-XG 952001190 emitter 2S50-PA-2-M03-NN 952001670 background suppression 28S50-PA-2-M03-PP 952001230 background suppression 28S50-PA-2-N03-NN 952001680 fore-background suppression 32S50-PA-2-N03-PP 952001440 fore-background suppression 32S50-PA-2-T01-NN 952001690 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PA-2-T01-PP 952001260 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PA-2-U03-NN 952001700 luminescence sensor 38S50-PA-2-U03-PP 952001300 luminescence sensor 38S50-PA-2-W03-NN 952001710 contrast sensor 36S50-PA-2-W03-PP 952001320 contrast sensor 36S50-PA-2-Y00-VK 952001340 distance sensor 40S50-PA-5-A00-NN 952002110 retroreflex 10S50-PA-5-A00-PP 952002100 retroreflex 10S50-PA-5-B01-NN 952001500 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PA-5-B01-PP 952001020 polarised retroreflex 12S50-PA-5-C01-NN 952001510 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PA-5-C01-PP 952001060 long diffuse proximity 22S50-PA-5-C10-NN 952001520 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PA-5-C10-PP 952001250 short diffuse proximity 18S50-PA-5-C21-NN 952002190 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-PA-5-C21-PP 952002180 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-PA-5-D00-NN 952001530 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PA-5-D00-PP 952001100 fixed focus proximity 24S50-PA-5-E01-NN 952001540 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-PA-5-E01-PP 952001140 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-PA-5-F01-NN 952001550 receiver 2S50-PA-5-F01-PP 952001160 receiver 2S50-PA-5-G00-XG 952001200 emitter 2S50-PA-5-M03-NN 952001560 background suppression 28S50-PA-5-M03-PP 952001000 background suppression 28S50-PA-5-N03-NN 952001570 fore-background suppression 32S50-PA-5-N03-PP 952001450 fore-background suppression 32S50-PA-5-T01-NN 952001580 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PA-5-T01-PP 952001270 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-PA-5-U03-NN 952001590 luminescence sensor 38S50-PA-5-U03-PP 952001310 luminescence sensor 38S50-PA-5-W03-NN 952001600 contrast sensor 36S50-PA-5-W03-PP 952001330 contrast sensor 36S50-PA-5-Y00-VK 952001350 distance sensor 40
PLASTIC FLAT HOUSING WITH LATERAL OPTICSMODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-PS-2-M03-NN 952001900 background suppression 30S50-PS-2-M03-PP 952001910 background suppression 30S50-PS-5-M03-NN 952001920 background suppression 30S50-PS-5-M03-PP 952001930 background suppression 30
MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX
46
METAL CYLINDRICAL HOUSING WITH LASER AXIAL OPTICSMODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-ML-2-B01-NN 952021820 laser retroreflex 14S50-ML-2-B01-PP 952021400 laser retroreflex 14S50-ML-2-C01-NN 952021830 laser proximity 26S50-ML-2-C01-PP 952021410 laser proximity 26S50-ML-2-F01-NN 952021840 laser receiver 8S50-ML-2-F01-PP 952021420 laser receiver 8S50-ML-2-G00-XG 952021430 laser emitter 8S50-ML-5-B01-NN 952021850 laser retroreflex 14S50-ML-5-B01-PP 952021440 laser retroreflex 14S50-ML-5-C01-NN 952021860 laser proximity 26S50-ML-5-C01-PP 952021450 laser proximity 26S50-ML-5-F01-NN 952021870 laser receiver 8S50-ML-5-F01-PP 952021460 laser receiver 8S50-ML-5-G00-XG 952021470 laser emitter 8
METAL CYLINDRICAL HOUSING WITH RADIAL OPTICSMODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-MR-2-B01-NN 952021600 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MR-2-B01-PP 952021140 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MR-2-C01-NN 952021610 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MR-2-C01-PP 952021150 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MR-2-C10-NN 952021620 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MR-2-C10-PP 952021490 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MR-2-D00-NN 952021630 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MR-2-D00-PP 952021160 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MR-2-F01-NN 952021640 receiver 4S50-MR-2-F01-PP 952021170 receiver 4S50-MR-2-G00-XG 952021180 emitter 4S50-MR-2-T01-NN 952021650 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MR-2-T01-PP 952021190 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MR-5-B01-NN 952021760 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MR-5-B01-PP 952021340 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MR-5-C01-NN 952021770 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MR-5-C01-PP 952021350 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MR-5-C10-NN 952021780 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MR-5-C10-PP 952021480 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MR-5-D00-NN 952021790 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MR-5-D00-PP 952021360 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MR-5-F01-NN 952021800 receiver 4S50-MR-5-F01-PP 952021370 receiver 4S50-MR-5-G00-XG 952021380 emitter 4S50-MR-5-T01-NN 952021810 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MR-5-T01-PP 952021390 retroreflex for transparents 16
METAL CYLINDRICAL HOUSING WITH AXIAL OPTICS MODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-MA-2-A00-NN 952022090 retroreflex 10S50-MA-2-A00-PP 952022080 retroreflex 10S50-MA-2-B01-NN 952021500 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MA-2-B01-PP 952021000 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MA-2-C01-NN 952021510 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MA-2-C01-PP 952021010 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MA-2-C10-NN 952021520 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MA-2-C10-PP 952021020 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MA-2-C21-NN 952022130 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-MA-2-C21-PP 952022120 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-MA-2-D00-NN 952021530 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MA-2-D00-PP 952021030 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MA-2-E01-NN 952021880 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-MA-2-E01-PP 952021040 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-MA-2-F01-NN 952021540 receiver 4S50-MA-2-F01-PP 952021050 receiver 4S50-MA-2-G00-XG 952021060 emitter 4S50-MA-2-M03-NN 952021550 background suppression 28S50-MA-2-M03-PP 952021070 background suppression 28S50-MA-2-N03-NN 952021560 fore-background suppression 32S50-MA-2-N03-PP 952021080 fore-background suppression 32S50-MA-2-T01-NN 952021570 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MA-2-T01-PP 952021090 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MA-2-U03-NN 952021580 luminescence sensor 38S50-MA-2-U03-PP 952021100 luminescence sensor 38S50-MA-2-W03-NN 952021590 contrast sensor 36S50-MA-2-W03-PP 952021110 contrast sensor 36S50-MA-2-Y00-VK 952021120 distance sensor 40S50-MA-5-A00-NN 952022110 retroreflex 10S50-MA-5-A00-PP 952022100 retroreflex 10S50-MA-5-B01-NN 952021660 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MA-5-B01-PP 952021200 polarised retroreflex 12S50-MA-5-C01-NN 952021670 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MA-5-C01-PP 952021210 long diffuse proximity 22S50-MA-5-C10-NN 952021680 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MA-5-C10-PP 952021220 short diffuse proximity 18S50-MA-5-C21-NN 952022150 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-MA-5-C21-PP 952022140 midi diffuse proximity 20S50-MA-5-D00-NN 952021690 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MA-5-D00-PP 952021230 fixed focus proximity 24S50-MA-5-E01-NN 952021890 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-MA-5-E01-PP 952021240 fibre-optic amplifier 34S50-MA-5-F01-NN 952021700 receiver 4S50-MA-5-F01-PP 952021250 receiver 4S50-MA-5-G00-XG 952021260 emitter 4S50-MA-5-M03-NN 952021710 background suppression 28S50-MA-5-M03-PP 952021270 background suppression 28S50-MA-5-N03-NN 952021720 fore-background suppression 32S50-MA-5-N03-PP 952021280 fore-background suppression 32S50-MA-5-T01-NN 952021730 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MA-5-T01-PP 952021290 retroreflex for transparents 16S50-MA-5-U03-NN 952021740 luminescence sensor 38S50-MA-5-U03-PP 952021300 luminescence sensor 38S50-MA-5-W03-NN 952021750 contrast sensor 36S50-MA-5-W03-PP 952021310 contrast sensor 36S50-MA-5-Y00-VK 952021320 distance sensor 40
METAL CYLINDRICAL HOUSING WITH LASER RADIAL OPTICSMODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-MH-2-B01-NN 952021940 laser retroreflex 14S50-MH-2-B01-PP 952021950 laser retroreflex 14S50-MH-2-C01-NN 952021990 laser proximity 26S50-MH-2-C01-PP 952021980 laser proximity 26S50-MH-2-F01-NN 952022030 laser receiver 8S50-MH-2-F01-PP 952022020 laser receiver 8S50-MH-2-G00-XG 952022060 laser emitter 8S50-MH-5-B01-NN 952021970 laser retroreflex 14S50-MH-5-B01-PP 952021960 laser retroreflex 14S50-MH-5-C01-NN 952022010 laser proximity 26S50-MH-5-C01-PP 952022000 laser proximity 26S50-MH-5-F01-NN 952022050 laser receiver 8S50-MH-5-F01-PP 952022040 laser receiver 8S50-MH-5-G00-XG 952022070 laser emitter 8
METAL CYLINDRICAL HOUSING WITH LATERAL OPTICSMODEL CODE N° OPTIC FUNCTION PAGES50-MS-2-M03-NN 952021900 background suppression 30S50-MS-2-M03-PP 952021910 background suppression 30S50-MS-5-M03-NN 952021920 background suppression 30S50-MS-5-M03-PP 952021930 background suppression 30
47
MODEL ALPHABETICAL INDEX
S 5 0 - P A - 2 - B 0 1 - N N
MODEL CODING TABLE
Note: Not all code combinations are available. Please refer to alphabetical model index for the list of available models.
HEADQUARTERS
DATASENSOR SpAvia Lavino, 265 - 40050 Monte San Pietro, BO - ItalyTel. +39 051/6765611 • Fax +39 051/6759324 www.datasensor.com • e-mail [email protected]
UN
IVE
RS
AL
TU
BU
LA
R S
EN
SO
RS
Datasensor SpA endeavours to continuously improve and renew its products; for this reason thetechnical data and contents of this catalogue may undergo variations without prior notice. For correctinstallation and use Datasensor SpA can guarantee only the data indicated in the instruction manualsupplied with the products. P
rin
ted
in It
aly
in O
cto
ber
200
7R
ev. 0
6
UNI EN ISO9001 UNI EN ISO14000
Distributed by:
HOUSING P = plastic flatM = metal cylindrical
OPTICSA = axialH = laser radialL = laser axial R = radialS = lateral
CONNECTION2 = cable5 = M12 connector
OPTIC FUNCTION refer to MODELALPHABETICALINDEX
SETTING0 = fixed1 = trimmer 3 = teach-in
push-button
INPUTS / OUTPUTS NN = NPN NO-NC outputsPP = PNP NO-NC outputsXG = no output - test inputVK = 0 - 10 Vdc output with
dir/inv sel. input
COAXIAL POLARISED RETROREFLEX FOR TRANSPARENTS
The high sensitivity and reducedhysterisis of this retroreflex sensorallow to detect even the slightestattenuat ion of the received lightemission, caused by the presenceof transparent objects, such asglass or PET bottles or plastic filmsheets for packaging. The presenceof polarisation filters avoids falseswitching on shiny surfaces andthe coaxial optics improves thedetection precision on the entireoperating range.
ACCESSORIES
For dedicated accessories refer to the
ACCESSORIES section of this catalogue.
Refer also to Reflectors (A.01), Connectors
(A.03) and Fixing Brackets (A.04) of the
General Catalogue
DIMENSIONS
INDICATORS AND SETTINGS Output status LED
Adjustment trimmer
M12 connector output
Cable output
A
B
C
D
CONNECTIONS
Single-turn trimmer for sensitivity adjustment. Rotate clockwise to increase the operating distance.
12
T
A
C
C
D
S60-PA-5S60-PA-2
B
A
BROWN
WHITE
BLACK
BLUE
NO OUTPUT
Vdc
NC OUTPUT
0V -(BLUE)
(WHITE)
+ 10 ... 30 Vdc(BROWN)
(BLACK)
NO OUTPUT
NC OUTPUT
1 Limit values2 Average life of 100.000 h with TA = +25 °C3 270° trimmer4 PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm2
SELECTION TABLEcoaxial optics - 2 m cable S60-PA-2-T51-NN 956201530 NPNS60-PA-2-T51-PP 956201380 PNP
coaxial optics - M12 connectorS60-PA-5-T51-NN 956201250 NPNS60-PA-5-T51-PP 956201100 PNP
All the ordering codes and information aresummarised in the last pages of this catalogue
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating distance: 0 ... 2 m Power supply: 10 ... 30 Vdc Ripple: ≤ 2 Vpp Consumption: ≤ 40 mALight emission: red LED 660 nmSpot dimension: aprox. 50 mm at 1.5 mSetting: sensitivity trimmer Indicators: yellow OUTPUT LED Output type:
PNP, NO and NCNPN, NO and NC
Output current: ≤ 100 mASaturation voltage: ≤ 2 V Response time: 500 µs Switching frequency: 1 kHz Operating mode: dark on NO / light on NCConnection:
2 m Ø 4 mm cableM12 4-pole connector
Electrical protection: class 2Mechanical protection: IP67Protection devices: A, BHousing material: ABSLens materiale: window in glass (tilted anti-reflection)Weight:
90 g max. 40 g max.
Operating temperature: -25 ... +55°C Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°CReference standard: EN 60947-5-2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
S60
-PA
-2-T
51-N
N
S60
-PA
-2-T
51-P
P
S60
-PA
-5-T
51-N
N
S60
-PA
-5-T
51-P
P
0,50 1 1,5 2 (m)
R2 1,5
Recommended operating distanceMaximum operating distance
R5
1,4
TECHNICAL NOTES
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
Detection areaExcess gain
1,7 2
1,7
R2
R5
R2
R5
2 m
5 Connector can be blocked on two positions 6 A - reverse polarity protection
B - overload and short-circuit protection on outputs
7 Internal lenses in glass
13
II3D
S2Z SERIESThe new S2Z Maxi series offers 4models, with basic optic functions: - through beam - polarized retroreflex - diffuse proximity- background suppression Versions with continuous and free-voltage Vac. Adjustable timingversions are also available.SPDT relay and bipolar transistorNPN/PNP open collector outputsare also offered.Terminal block connectionsimplif ies and speeds-upinstallation. The heavy-dutyplastic housing guaranteesexcellent resistance in the mostsevere working conditions.
HIGHLIGHTS
• IP67 mechanical protection
• Timing versions
• Terminal block connection
• Versions with continuous and
multi-voltage power supply
• Anti-interference system
• Shock-resistant housing ideal for
severe working conditions
CARATTERISTICHE
Conveyors
APPLICATIONS
www.automation.datalogic.com
SE
NS
OR
S
SENSORSMAXI SENSORS
Automotive industry
Automatic warehouses
CONNECTIONS
Receiver B/C model
Emitter C model
Emitter B model
Emitter M model
F/G model
DIMENSIONS
www.automation.datalogic.com
The M model presents a multi-turn adjustment screw for theadjustment of the backgroundsuppression distance through amechanical variation of the optictriangulation angle. The othermodels have a mono-turnelectronic trimmer that adjuststhe sensitivity and the sensoroperating distance. The operatingdistance increases, rotating thescrews in a clockwise direction.The output activation anddeactivation delay time can beadjusted by a trimmer that canvary from 0.1 to 5 sec. and thesensor functioning mode can beselected thanks to a ten-positionselector.
mm
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
OUTPUT LED (yellow)
STABILITY LED (green)
Adjustment screw (only M model)
Sensitivity trimmer (B/C/F/G model)
Timing control
Operating mode selector
D
E
F
E
F
INDICATORS
SETTING
MULTI-VOLTAGE MODELS
CONTINUOUS MODELS
S2Z…B/C/F/M S2Z…G
S2Z…B/C/F/M S2Z…G
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS S2Z-F/G S2Z-B S2Z-C S2Z-M
Emission type: IR LED red LED IR LED
Operating distances (typical values): 50m 0.2…7m 1m 0.2…2m
Setting: Mono-turn sensitivity trimmer Multi-turn distance
adjustment screw
White/Black difference (90% / 4%) < 35%
Hysteresis on 90% white: ≤ 20% ≤ 15%
Indicators: OUTPUT LED (yellow) OUTPUT LED
STABILITY LED (green) (yellow)
Operating temperature: -25…50°C
Storage temperature: -40…70°C
Dielectric strength: 500Vac 1 min between electronics and housing
Insulating resistance: >20MΩ 500 Vdc between electronics and housing
Ambient light rejection: according to EN 60947-5-2
Vibrations: 0.5mm width, 10 … 55Hz frequency, for each axis (EN60068-2-6)
Shock resistance: 11ms (30G) 6 shocks for each axis (EN60068-2-27)
Housing material: PBT
Lens material: PC/PET PMMA PC/PET PMMA/PC
Mechanical protection: IP67 (IEC / EN60529) / NEMA TYPE 1 (For UL / c-UL)
Connections: Terminal block (recommended cable diameter between 8 and 10 mm)
MULTI-VOLTAGE MODELS S2Z-F/G S2Z-B S2Z-C S2Z-M
Power supply: 24…240Vac / 12…240Vdc
Ripple: 10% max
Consumption (output current excluded): 3VA max 3VA max
(G model)
3VA max
(F model)
Outputs: SPDT electromagnetic relay: 250Vac, 30Vdc
Output current: 3A (resistance load)
Response time: 20ms max
Switching frequency: 25Hz
Weight: 115g (G mod) 130g
130g (F mod)
CONTINUOUS MODELS S2Z-F/G S2Z-B S2Z-C S2Z-M
Power supply: 12…24Vdc
Ripple: 10% max
Consumption (output current excluded): 20mA max 30mA max.
(G model)
25mA max
(F model)
Outputs: PNP and NPN open collector
Output current: 100 mA (resistance load)
Output saturation voltage: 2.4V max
Response time: 1ms max
Switching frequency: 500Hz
Weight: 105g (G mod) 110g
110g (F mod)
TECHNICAL DATA
www.automation.datalogic.com
TIMING FUNCTION DIAGRAM
Four selectable timing functions: one shot, ON delay, OFF delay and normal mode. Thefunctions can be adjusted, using a trimmer, from 0.1 to 5 seconds.
The timing functions can be particularly useful in applications where the output signal pulse hasto be modified.
Through beam
DETECTION DIAGRAMS
m
cm
Diffuse proximity
mm
mm
Polarized retroreflex on R2 reflector
mm
mm
Background suppression
mm
%
6% black /90% white
18% grey /90% white
90% white
18% grey
Other modelsThrough beam
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
Recommended operating distance Maximum operating distance
200 40 60 80 (m)
7050
20 4 6 8 10 (m)
S2Z-M
S2Z-B
2
S2Z-C1
2.1
1.2
7 9
MODEL POWER SUPPLY DELAY OUTPUT N° ORDERS2Z-PA-1-B01-RX Vac/Vdc Relay 95B051000S2Z-PA-1-B06-RX Vac/Vdc • Relay 95B051010S2Z-PA-5-B01-OX Vdc PNP/NPN transistor 95B051020S2Z-PA-5-B06-OX Vdc • PNP/NPN transistor 95B051030S2Z-PA-1-M01-RX Vac/Vdc Relay 95B051040S2Z-PA-1-M06-RX Vac/Vdc • Relay 95B051050S2Z-PA-5-M01-OX Vdc PNP/NPN transistor 95B051060S2Z-PA-5-M06-OX Vdc • PNP/NPN transistor 95B051070 S2Z-PA-1-C01-RX Vac/Vdc Relay 95B051080S2Z-PA-1-C06-RX Vac/Vdc • Relay 95B051090S2Z-PA-5-C01-OX Vdc PNP/NPN transistor 95B051100S2Z-PA-5-C06-OX Vdc • PNP/NPN transistor 95B051110S2Z-PA-1-FG01-RX Vac/Vdc Relay 95B051130S2Z-PA-1-FG06-R Vac/Vdc • Relay 95B051140S2Z-PA-5-FG01-OX Vdc PNP/NPN transistor 95B051160S2Z-PA-5-FG06-OX Vdc • PNP/NPN transistor 95B051170
The company endeavours to continuously improve and renew its products; for this reason the technical data and contents of this catalogue may undergo variationswithout prior notice. For correct installation and use, the company can guarantee only the data indicated in the instruction manual supplied with the products.
Printed in Italy in May 2009, Rev. 00
www.datasensor.comwww.automation.datalogic.com
MODEL SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
CO
NT
RA
ST
SE
NS
OR
S
The TL10 series is composed of analog contrast sensors with incandescent lampemission with long life and easy interchangeability.The sensors present a mechanical multi-turn optic adjuster for the sensitivityregulation, a switch for the dark/light operating mode selection and a red LED thatsignals the NPN transistor output activation. Different models are available with 8, 28 and 50 mm lenses.
TL10 SERIES
ANALOGUE SENSORS WITH LAMP EMISSION
• Incandescent lamp emission • Optic adjustment of the sensitivity• 8, 28 and 50 mm lenses available • Dark/light mode selector
The sensors of the TL10 series and relative accessories are available as spare parts. Contrast sensors of the TLµ series are recommended for replacements, newapplications and improved performances.
TECHNICAL DATA DETECTION DIAGRAMSPower supply: ............................................... 10 ... 30 Vdc, reverse polarity protection
4.5 Vac for lamp emission
Consumption: ............................................... 50 mA max.
Light emission: ............................................. 4.5 V (0,8 A) incandescent lamp
Spot dimension: ........................................... 5 x 1 mm (8 mm lens)
6 x 2.5 mm (28 mm lens)
8 x 2.5 mm (50 mm lens)
Operating distance: ...................................... 8 ... 12 mm (8 mm lens)
28 ... 36 mm (28 mm lens)
46 ... 54 mm (50 mm lens)
Depth of field: ............................................... ±2 mm (8 mm lens)
±4 mm (28 and 50 mm lenses)
Setting: .......................................................... mechanical multi-turn actuator
Indicators: ..................................................... red OUTPUT LED
Output type: .................................................. NPN
Saturation voltage: ....................................... 1.4 V max.
Output current: ............................................. 100 mA max., short-circuit protection
Response time: .............................................50 µs max.
Switching frequency: ................................... 10 KHz max.
Operating mode : ..........................................dark/light selectable
Connection: ...................................................3 m Ø 5.5 mm cable
cable with Amphenol connector
Electrical protection: ....................................class 1
Mechanical protection: ................................ IP67
Housing material: ......................................... ZAMA
Lens material: ............................................... glass
Weight: .......................................................... 600 g max.
Operating temperature: ................................-10 ... +55°C
Storage temperature: ................................... -20 ... +70°C
Fibre operating temperature: ...................... -30 ... +60°C
Reference standard: ..................................... EN 60947-5-2
Certifications: ...............................................
The operating distances indicate the detection distance with excess gain 2.
28 mm lens
8 mm lens
50 mm lens
The detection diagrams indicate the typicaloperating distance with excess gain 1.
UNI EN ISO9001 UNI EN ISO14000
CONNECTIONS
DIMENSIONS
CABLE VERSIONS
28 mm lens
50 mm lens
AMPHENOL CONNECTOR VERSIONS
mm
46
50
Ø 4
8.5
M20x0
.75
Ø 3
3
42
M20x0
.75
6
44
CO
NT
RA
ST
SE
NS
OR
S
MODEL DESCRIPTION CODE N°
010066 6V/6W lamp vertical spot (standard vers.) S2600030
010067 6V/6W lamp horizontal spot (90° vers.) S2610300
Please refer also to Sensor Accessories
MODEL OPTICS SPOT CONNECTION OUTPUT CODE N°
TL10-011 8 mm vertical cable NPN S917660100
TL10-012 8 mm vertical Amphenol connector NPN S917660105
TL10-011L 8 mm horizontal cable NPN S917660102
TL10-021 28 mm vertical cable NPN S917660101
TL10-031 50 mm vertical cable NPN S917660103
MODEL SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
ACCESSORY SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
Distributed by:
Pri
nte
d in
Ital
y in
Ju
ly 2
005
Rev
. 02
The sensors of the TL10 series and relative accessories are available as spare parts. Contrast sensors of the TLµ series are recommended for replacements, newapplications and improved performances.
HEADQUARTERS
DATASENSOR SpAvia Lavino, 265 - 40050 Monte San Pietro, BO - ItalyTel. +39 051/6765611 • Fax +39 051/6759324 www.datasensor.com • e-mail [email protected]
Datasensor SpA endeavours to continuously improve and renew its products; for this reason thetechnical data and contents of this catalogue may undergo variations without prior notice. For correctinstallation and use Datasensor SpA can guarantee only the data indicated in the instruction manualsupplied with the products.
CO
NT
RA
ST
SE
NS
OR
S
• Red or green selectable LED emission • Threshold setting with multi-turn trimmer • 9, 18, 28 mm lenses and fibre-optics available • Selectable NPN/PNP output and dark/light mode
The TL80 series is composed of analog-based contast sensors with LEDemission, distinguished by good depth of field and high switching frequencyreaching 10 kHz.Switching threshold setting is aided by two arrow indicators showing the multiturntrimmer’s rotation direction; moreover switches for the selection of the red orgreen emission, dark or light operating mode, NPN or PNP output and timingfunction are also present.Accessory lenses for different operating distances and various proximity andthrough beam fibre-optics extend the application possibilities. The sturdy metalhousing guarantees IP67 protection.
TL80 SERIES
ANALOG SENSORS WITH LED EMISSION
The sensors of the TL80 series and relative accessories are available as spare parts. Contrast sensors of the TLµ series are recommended for replacements, newapplications and improved performances.
TECHNICAL DATA DETECTION DIAGRAMSPower supply: ............................................... 10 ... 30 Vdc, reverse polarity protection
Consumption: ............................................... 80 mA max.
Light emission: ............................................. red 630 nm / green 526 nm LED
Spot dimension: ........................................... 1.5 x 5 mm (9 mm lens)
2 x 7 mm (18 mm lens)
3 x 10 mm (28 mm lens)
Operating distance: ...................................... 7 ... 11 mm (9 mm lens)
16 ... 20 mm (18 mm lens)
25 ... 31 mm (28 mm lens)
Operating distance with fibre-optics: ......... 0 ... 5 mm proximity
0 ... 15 mm through beam
Depth of field: ............................................... ±2 mm (9 and 18 mm lenses)
±3 mm (28 mm lens)
Setting: .......................................................... multi-turn trimmer
Indicators: ..................................................... red OUTPUT LED
red LEDs for trimmer rotation direction
Output type: .................................................. NPN or PNP, Rpull-down/up 10 kΩ
Saturation voltage: ....................................... 1.2 V max. (NPN vers.)
2.2 V max. (PNP vers.)
Output current: ............................................. 200 mA max.; short-circuit protection
Response time: .............................................50 µs (8, 18 mm, fibre-optic vers.)
166 µs (28 mm vers.)
Switching frequency: ................................... 10 KHz max. (8, 18 mm, fibre-optic vers.)
3.3 KHz max. (28 mm vers.)
Operating mode: ...........................................dark/light selectable
Analog output range: ................................... 0 ... 5.5 Vdc (2 Vdc on white 90%)
2.2 kΩ output resistance
Timing function: ........................................... 20 ms minimum output ON
Connection: ...................................................M12 4-pole conn., 3 m Ø 5 mm cable
or cable with Amphenol connector
Electrical protection: ....................................class 1
Mechanical protection: ................................ IP67
Housing material: ......................................... ZAMA
Lens material: ............................................... glass
Fibre-optic material: ..................................... fibre in glass / sheath in metal
fibre in PMMA / sheath in PE (OF-30)
Weight: .......................................................... 550 g max.
Operating temerature: .................................. -10 ... +55°C
Storage temperature: ................................... -20 ... +70°C
Fibre operating temperature: ...................... -30 ... +150°C (glass OF vers.)
-30 ... +60°C (OF-30)
Reference standard: ..................................... EN 60947-5-2
Certifications: ...............................................
18 mm lens
9 mm lens
28 mm lens
Proximity fibre-optics
Through beam fibre-optics
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
%
%
%
%
UNI EN ISO9001 UNI EN ISO14000
CONNECTIONS
DIMENSIONS
mm
M12 CONNECTOR
AMPHENOL CONNECTOR VERSIONS
OF-35
OPTIC FIBRES
OF-30
OF-31
OF-32
OF-33
OF-34
2.512.5 12.5 27.5
50035
Ø 3
M4
12.5+0-0.1
1000
35
Ø 8
Ø 2.5M6
12.5+0-0.11000
35
Ø 8
3
1
M6
12.5+0-0.11000
35
Ø 8
Ø 1.6
M6
12.5+0-0.1
12.5+0-0.1
1000
1000
35
35
1
88
3
3
13.4
M5x5 n°8
21
30
87
41.5
28
36
.5
62.5
58.5
Ø 5
Ø 25
Ø 25
Ø 33
24
15.5
4
744.5
75
28
CO
NT
RA
ST
SE
NS
OR
S
MODEL DESCRIPTION CODE N°
OF-30-5 plastic fibre-optic L 50 cm - point-shaped spot proximity 96B001070
OF-31-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - point-shaped spot proximity 96B201000
OF-32-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - rectangular spot proximity 96B211000
OF-33-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - through beam 96B221000
OF-34-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - horizontal spot 90° proximity 96B231000
OF-35-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - vertical spot 90° proximity 96B241000
Please refer also to Sensor Accessories
MODEL SPOT OPTICS CONNECTION CODE N°
TL80-011 vertical 9 mm cable 964051000
TL80-011L horizontal 9 mm cable 964051010
TL80-012 vertical 9 mm Amphenol connector 964051020
TL80-012L horizontal 9 mm Amphenol connector 964051030
TL80-015 vertical 9 mm M12 connector 964051040
TL80-015L horizontal 9 mm M12 connector 964051050
TL80-061 vertical 18 mm cable 964051180
TL80-065 vertical 18 mm M12 connector 964051220
TL80-021 vertical 28 mm cable 964051060
TL80-025 vertical 28 mm M12 connector 964051100
TL80F-041 refer to fibers optic fibre cable 964051120
TL80F-042 refer to fibers optic fibre Amphenol connector 964051130
TL80F-045 refer to fibers optic fibre M12 connector 964051140
MODEL SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
ACCESSORY SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
Distributed by:
Pri
nte
d in
Ital
y in
Ju
ly 2
005
Rev
. 04
HEADQUARTERS
DATASENSOR SpAvia Lavino, 265 - 40050 Monte San Pietro, BO - ItalyTel. +39 051/6765611 • Fax +39 051/6759324 www.datasensor.com • e-mail [email protected]
Datasensor SpA endeavours to continuously improve and renew its products; for this reason thetechnical data and contents of this catalogue may undergo variations without prior notice. For correctinstallation and use Datasensor SpA can guarantee only the data indicated in the instruction manualsupplied with the products.
The sensors of the TL80 series and relative accessories are available as spare parts. Contrast sensors of the TLµ series are recommended for replacements, newapplications and improved performances.
CO
NT
RA
ST
SE
NS
OR
S
• ‘Teach-in’, ‘Remote’ setting and models with ‘Auto-Set’• Red/green or white LED emission • Various interchangeable lenses and fibre-optic versions • Metal housing with orientable optics and connector
The TLµµ series offers the most reliable and innovative solutions for all detectionapplications of register marks and other neutral or coloured references. The microprocessor-based setting can be either ‘Teach-in’ using two push-buttonsor ‘Remote’ by cable with the possibility of rapidly memorising and recalling 4different formats. The setting can also be dynamic and completely automatic in themodels with the ‘Auto-Set’ function.The LED emission can be red/green with automatic selection, or white offering thepossibility of operating on all contrasts, also amongst same-coloured objects andbackgrounds, presenting different surface treatments or workings.Models with interchangeable 9 mm or 18 mm lenses are available; 22, 28 and 50mm lenses are supplied as accessories. Moreover many different fibre-opticmodels are available. The output is NPN or PNP according to the model, but isalways selectable by means of an internal switch; an analog output proportional tothe received light is also present.
TLµµ SERIES
µµP BASED SENSORS WITH LED EMISSION
TECHNICAL DATA DETECTION DIAGRAMSPower supply: ............................................... 10 ... 30 Vdc, reverse polarity protection
Consumption: ............................................... 80 mA max.
Light emission: ............................................. red 630 nm / green 526 nm LED
white LED (TLµ-4/5xx vers.)
Spot dimension: ........................................... 1.5 x 5 mm (9 mm lens)
Ø 3 mm (9 lens - circular)
2 x 7 mm (18 mm lens)
Operating distance: ...................................... 6 ... 12 mm (9 mm lens)
14 ... 22 mm (18 mm lens)
22 ... 34 mm (28 mm lens)
40 ... 60 mm (50 mm lens)
Operating distance with fibre-optics: ......... 0 ... 3 mm proximity
0 ... 10 mm through beam
Depth of field: ............................................... ±3 mm (9 mm lens)
±4 mm (18 mm lens)
±6 mm (28 mm lens)
±10 mm (50 mm lens)
Setting: .......................................................... Teach-in with 2 push-buttons
Remote with 2 wires
dynamic Auto-Set (vers.TLµ-417/517)
Indicators: ..................................................... red OUTPUT LED
green POWER LED (vers.TLµ-417/517)
green READY LED
Output type: .................................................. NPN or PNP, Rpull-down/up 10 kΩSaturation voltage: ....................................... 1 V max. (NPN vers.)
2 V max. (PNP vers.)
Output current: ............................................. 200 mA max., short-circuit protection
Response time: .............................................50 µs max., 25 µs max. (TLµ-4/5xx vers.)
Switching frequency: ................................... 10 kHz max., 20 kHz max. (TLµ-4/5xx vers.)
Operating mode: .......................................... automatic dark/light selection
Analog output range: ................................... 0 ... 5.5 Vdc (2 Vdc on white 90%)
2.2 kΩ output resistance
Timing function: ........................................... 20 ms minimum output ON
Connection: .................................................. M12 4-pole connector
3m Ø 6.1 mm shielded cable
Electrical protection: ....................................class 1
Mechanical protection: ................................ IP67
Housing material: ......................................... ZAMA
Lens material: ............................................... glass
Fibre-optic material: ..................................... fibre in glass / sheath in metal
fibre in PMMA / sheath in PE (OF-30)
Weight: .......................................................... 310 g max. (connector vers.)
450 g max. (cable vers.)
Operating temperature: ............................... -10 ... +55°C
Storage temperature: ................................... -25 ... +70°C
Fibre operating temperature: ...................... -30 ... +150°C (glass OF vers.)
-30 ... +60°C (OF-30)
Reference standard: ..................................... EN 60947-5-2
Certifications: ...............................................
The operating distances indicate the typical detection distance.
22 mm lens
9 mm lens
28 mm lens
50 mm lens
Proximity fibre-optics
Through beam fibre-optics
18 mm lens
The detection diagrams indicate the typicaloperating distance.
UNI EN ISO9001 UNI EN ISO14000
II3D
CONNECTIONS
DIMENSIONS
M12 CONNECTOR
mm
NPN/PNP OUTPUT
NPN/PNP OUTPUT
*
* Dark/light mode selection input for Auto-Set models
50 mm lens OF-35
OPTIC FIBRES
OF-30
OF-31
OF-32
OF-33
OF-34
2.512.5 12.5 27.5
50035
Ø 3
M4
12.5+0-0.1
1000
35
Ø 8
Ø 2.5M6
12.5+0-0.11000
35
Ø 8
3
1
M6
12.5+0-0.11000
35
Ø 8
Ø 1.6
M6
12.5+0-0.1
12.5+0-0.1
1000
1000
35
35
1
88
3
3
13.4
Ø 2
8
M20x0
.75
31.5
28
Ø 2
5
Ø 3
3
M20x0
.75
15
11.5
42
M2
0x0
.75
6
44
22 mm lensHI-RES lens
28 mm lens
18 mm lens
LENSES
46
50
Ø 4
8.5
M20x0
.75
4
9.2
20
Ø 2
5
M20x0
.75
18 mm lens
cap
READY LED
MARK PUSH-BUTTON
OUTPUT LED
BKGDPUSH-BUTTON
M12 CONNECTOR15
4.37.5
81.2
20.92827.514.19 mm lens
n°4 M5x6n°4 M5x0.24
n°4 M5x6n°4 M5x0.242836.6
Ø 2
5
Ø 6
.1
24
39.8
5.9
58
42.2
31
M12x1
CAP
Ø 2
5
21
MODEL EMISSION SPOT OPTICS CONNECTION OUTPUT CODE N°
TLµ-011 red/green vertical 9 mm cable NPN 964401000
TLµ-011L red/green horizontal 9 mm cable NPN 964401010
TLµ-015 red/green vertical 9 mm M12 connector NPN 964401020
TLµ-015L red/green horizontal 9 mm M12 connector NPN 964401030
TLµ-061 red/green vertical 18 mm cable NPN 964401040
TLµ-065 red/green vertical 18 mm M12 connector NPN 964401060
TLµ-111 red/green vertical 9 mm cable PNP 964401080
TLµ-111L red/green horizontal 9 mm cable PNP 964401090
TLµ-115 red/green vertical 9 mm M12 connector PNP 964401100
TLµ-115L red/green horizontal 9 mm M12 connector PNP 964401110
TLµ-161 red/green vertical 18 mm cable PNP 964401120
TLµ-165 red/green vertical 18 mm M12 connector PNP 964401140
TLµ-415C white circular 9 mm M12 connector NPN 954151330
TLµ-417C (*) white circular 9 mm M12 connector NPN 954151340
TLµ-445 white refer to fibres fibre-optic M12 connector NPN 954151350
TLµ-515C white circular 9 mm M12 connector PNP 954151360
TLµ-517C (*) white circular 9 mm M12 connector PNP 954151370
TLµ-545 white refer to fibres fibre-optic M12 connector PNP 954151380
* Automatic dynamic setting with ‘Auto-Set’ function
CO
NT
RA
ST
SE
NS
OR
S
MODEL DESCRIPTION CODE N°
Lens Hi-Res lens with 9 mm focus (*) 95ACC1050
Lens No.18 lens with 18 mm focus 95ACC1030
Lens No.22 lens with 22 mm focus 95ACC1100
Lens No.28 lens with 28 mm focus 890000194
Lens No.50 lens with 50 mm focus S73030511
OF-30-5 plastic fibre-optic L 50 cm - point-shaped spot proximity 96B001070
OF-31-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - point-shaped spot proximity 96B201000
OF-32-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - rectangular spot proximity 96B211000
OF-33-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - through beam 96B221000
OF-34-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - horizontal spot 90° proximity 96B231000
OF-35-10 glass fibre-optic L 100 cm - vertical spot 90° proximity 96B241000
* focussing lens to screw between the sensor and the normal 9 mm lensPlease refer also to Sensor Accessories
MODEL SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
ACCESSORY SELECTION AND ORDER INFORMATION
Distributed by:
Pri
nte
d in
Ital
y in
Ju
ly 2
005
Rev
. 05
HEADQUARTERS
DATASENSOR SpAvia Lavino, 265 - 40050 Monte San Pietro, BO - ItalyTel. +39 051/6765611 • Fax +39 051/6759324 www.datasensor.com • e-mail [email protected]
Datasensor SpA endeavours to continuously improve and renew its products; for this reason thetechnical data and contents of this catalogue may undergo variations without prior notice. For correctinstallation and use Datasensor SpA can guarantee only the data indicated in the instruction manualsupplied with the products.